JP6802495B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

In general, a pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number value for lottery when a game ball enters a starting port, and temporarily stores this as an operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Each time such a predetermined start condition is satisfied, such an operation holding ball is sequentially digested one by one, and a hit / fail determination of whether or not it corresponds to a big hit is executed. If the result of the winning / failing judgment is a big hit, the decorative symbol consisting of a plurality of rows is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the large winning opening which is normally closed is opened. A special game (big hit game) to be in a state is established.

In this type of pachinko gaming machine, it is known that when a game ball enters the large winning opening during the execution of a special game, the large winning opening winning effect (for example, displaying the number of winning balls and outputting sound effects) is executed. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-123602

Since many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the interest of the game in order to differentiate it from the conventional models.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention has a game board in which a game area is formed, a start port provided in the game area where a game ball can enter, and a start port. A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination triggered by the entry of the gaming ball, and a large prize provided in the game area and opened according to the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means so that the gaming ball can enter. When the result of the hit / fail judgment by the mouth and the hit / fail judgment means is a big hit, the big prize opening is opened until the number of game balls entered into the big prize opening reaches the specified number or the specified time elapses. It is equipped with a special game execution means that can shift to a special game in which a unit game to be released is repeated a plurality of times, an effect display device that displays an effect display, and an audio output device that outputs an effect sound, and the execution period of the special game is , The start demo period, which is the period set between the start of execution of the special game and the start of execution of the first unit game, and the period from the start of execution of the first unit game to the end of execution of the final unit game. Including the unit game execution period and the end demo period, which is the period set between the end of the execution of the final unit game and the end of the execution of the special game, one unit game enters the grand prize opening. The condition that the number of game balls exceeds the specified number is set as the specified number exceeding condition, and if the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, the ball is entered into the large winning opening in one unit game. It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests or notifies that the number of game balls has exceeded the specified number, and it is configured to be able to determine a plurality of types of errors including at least the first error and the second error. The second error is an error related to the payout of the prize ball, while the first error is an error different from the error related to the payout of the prize ball, and the first error occurs during the execution of the special game. When the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied, at least a part or all of the specific effect is not executed, while the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied in the situation where the first error occurs during the execution of the special game. Can execute the payout of the prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening, which triggers the satisfaction of the specified number exceeding condition, and the second error occurs during the execution of the special game. If the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied, the specific effect can be executed, while the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied in the situation where the second error occurs during the execution of the special game. In that case, the above-mentioned trigger for satisfying the above-mentioned specified number exceeding condition It is configured so that the payout of the prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening is not executed, and the player takes the opportunity of the game ball entering the large winning opening during the execution of the special game. The cumulative prize ball number display, which is a display showing the cumulative value of the prize balls given to, can be updated and displayed, and when the cumulative prize ball number display is updated and displayed, one game ball to the large winning opening is displayed. This is an effect that is executed for a predetermined time in response to the entry of the ball, and is an effect that indicates that the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up by the number of prize balls given based on the entry. It is feasible, and despite the fact that during the execution of a special game, a certain count-up effect corresponding to the entry of a certain game ball into the grand prize opening is being executed. Even if a new game ball different from the one game ball is entered in the large winning opening, the execution of the certain count-up effect is not interrupted in the middle, and the certain game ball is entered. After the execution of the count-up effect is completed, a new count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one new game ball is started to be executed, and a predetermined time is set during the execution of one unit game. The total execution time of the count-up effect when the count-up effect is executed for the same number of times as twice the specified number is set shorter than the end demo period, and is provided in the game area. , The game ball has a predetermined winning opening that can be entered, and the predetermined effect can be executed when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening during the execution of the special game, and the predetermined effect can be executed during the execution of the special game. When the cumulative value of the number of prize balls reaches a specific value, a specific value corresponding display indicating that the cumulative value of the number of prize balls has reached the specific value can be displayed separately from the display of the cumulative number of prize balls. The condition for exceeding the specified number is that the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening in one unit game exceeds the specified number, and the condition for exceeding the specified number is satisfied during the execution of the special game. In this case, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests or notifies that the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening in one unit game exceeds the specified number, and a certain specific value correspondence display is displayed. Even if a game ball enters the large winning opening during the process, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls shown in the specific value correspondence display is not updated and displayed, and the specific value correspondence is supported. While the display is continuously displayed for a specific time, if a game ball enters the large winning opening while a certain specific value correspondence display is being displayed, the certain specific value correspondence display is displayed. This The count-up effect triggered by the entry of the ball can be executed at the same time, and when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening while the display corresponding to a specific value is displayed, the specific value is specified. While the value correspondence display can be displayed and the predetermined effect can be executed at the same time, if the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied while the specific value correspondence display is being displayed, the specific value correspondence is supported. The feature is that a specific effect can be executed at the same time while displaying the display .

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a rear view of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a control block diagram of the said pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the effect control board of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol winning / failing lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 1 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol attribute of a decorative symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the jackpot symbol combination of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot medium effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the super longevity jackpot production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Kotobuki jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Kotobuki jackpot B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Ki jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of the Ki jackpot B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen during a round game. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining the structure of a prize-related production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the over prize production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the big prize opening count-up production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the bonus prize-winning production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the general prize opening count-up production. It is a time chart used to explain the priority of the big prize opening count-up production. It is a schematic diagram used for the explanation of the emphasis effect. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the error type of a game machine. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over-winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the detection state of a touch sensor, an over winning effect, and a general winning effect. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the game state in which a game start preparation effect is executed, and the game state in which an over-winning effect and a bonus prize-winning effect are executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the volume adjustment screen. This is a time chart used to explain the overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect. It is a time chart when over-winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. It is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the general prize opening. It is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 35 of the main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the process of displaying a special symbol stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which follows FIG. 47 of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize production content determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows typically the special symbol winning / failing lottery table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol jackpot symbol table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a comparison table of the variation time of the special symbol of the 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram provided for the explanation of the ordinary symbol lottery of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
The front view and the rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined with reference to this drawing. The pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machines are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second game (first special symbol game) and the second game. It is possible to develop a game (second special symbol game).

<Basic configuration of pachinko game machines>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as “gaming machine PM”) is fitted to the front surface of the opening of the outer frame 1 forming the vertical fixed holding frame configured in the outer rectangular frame size. The front frame 2 which is configured in the size of a square frame and forms an opening / closing mounting frame is attached to the front right edge so that it can be opened / closed and detached sideways by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 arranged on the front left edge of each other. It is always held in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided.

A square glass frame 5 that matches the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and the locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state that covers the front surface of the front frame 2. The game board 20 is detachably set and held in the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visible through the double glazing of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. There is.

On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker 11 that generates a sound effect according to the development status of the game are provided. Upper and lower ball plates (upper ball plate 8 and lower ball plate 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and an effect of being pressed by a player in the center of the front of the upper ball plate 8 A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for launching a game ball is provided on the front right side of the lower ball plate 9. In the following, for convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as "effect button 15", but the effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button type switch, and outputs according to the direction of operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button), tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch sensor , Touch panel, etc., used in concepts that include all types of operation input means.

The game board 20 is constructed based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 are fixedly fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which the game ball can roll is formed as a section. Further, the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42 form a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA, and the position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (inner rail 42). A ball return prevention valve 43 is provided at the tip end portion) to prevent the game ball discharged from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various types such as a first starting port 51, a second starting port 52, an operating gate 53, a large winning opening 54, and a general winning opening 61, 62, 63, 64, etc. In addition to the winning openings, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol hold lamp 73, the second special symbol hold lamp 74, the ordinary symbol display device 75, the normal symbol hold lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the central opening of the center decoration 21.

The game area PA is based on the center decoration 21 in the center, the left area PA1 which is the left area of the center decoration 21 (the board area corresponding to the left hit) and the right area of the center decoration 21 (corresponding to the right hit). It is divided into a right side area PA2 which is a board area). A top plate portion 22 facing the outer rail 41 in the substantially vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center decoration 21, and is located between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 on the extension of the guide passage. A connecting passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right side region PA2 is formed. In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can mainly enter any of the first starting port 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged below the center decoration 21. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can mainly enter any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. Is. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided to discharge the game ball that has rolled down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting port 51 is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a left-handed game ball) that mainly flows down the left side region PA1 can enter the ball. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the special symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right side region PA2 which is a board surface region corresponding to right-handed hitting, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) which mainly flows down the right side region PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the special symbol that is variablely displayed or stopped displayed on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a "second special symbol". The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522, which is generally called an electric chew, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522. The ordinary electric accessory 522 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52 or is difficult to enter. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced in the open state, and at a predetermined opportunity described later (an opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a front-rear sliding movable member 524 for opening and closing the second starting port 52. The movable member 524 has a closed position (protruding position) that closes the second starting port 52 to make it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and the second starting port 52 is opened to allow the game ball to enter. It is possible to slide in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) with the open position (retracted position) for ease. The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to incline downward from the right side to the left side in the front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a taxiway, and the game ball can flow down on the taxiway from right to left. It flows down toward you and falls from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

The actuating gate 53 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an actuating gate switch 531 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball through the operating gate 53 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting port 52.

The large winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened when the winning / failing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The large prize opening 54 is a large winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. It is equipped with a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 54 or is difficult to enter. In this example, the large winning opening 54 is provided in the right side area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in special games (big hit game, small hit game), when launching a game ball, it is easy to enter the big winning opening 54 by hitting the right area PA2, so-called right hit. It has become.

The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side region PA1 which is a board surface region corresponding to left-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the left side region PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 include a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The left general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like, and the game ball to any of the general winning openings 61 to 63 It is also possible to detect the entry of a ball.

The general winning opening 64 is arranged in the right side area PA2, which is a board surface area corresponding to right-handed hitting, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 includes a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into each of the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not trigger the lottery of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, but the opportunity to acquire the prize ball like the other winning openings (excluding the operating gate 53). It becomes.

The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and definite display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and definite display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variation display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed with.

The first special figure holding lamp 73 and the second special figure holding lamp 74 are composed of, for example, two LED lamps, respectively, and the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the lighting / blinking display of the lamps. (Maximum 4 each) is expressed. The number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is a number related to a random number value acquired based on the entry of balls into the first starting port 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. Yes, the acquired random number value is withheld, that is, the number of times that the hit / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the hit / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value is shown. Similarly, the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is a random number value acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. This is the number to which the acquired random number value is withheld, that is, the number for which the hit / fail judgment is temporarily suspended until the hit / fail judgment permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. There is.

The ordinary symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and definite display of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol hold lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of hold of normal symbol fluctuations (the number of normal symbol fluctuations that have not yet been executed). A round display 77 is provided on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75 to display the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (number of rounds: number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated). ing.

The effect display device 70 mainly includes a variation effect of a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed / stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a notice effect that suggests or informs the expectation of a big hit in advance. In addition to displaying the image, the hold display corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display area 700 for executing variable display of decorative symbols, a notice effect display, and the like, a first special figure hold lamp 73, and a second special figure hold lamp 74. A holding image display area 710 in which the reserved image of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in synchronization with the above, and a changing image display area 720 in which the changing image corresponding to the fluctuation display is displayed are provided. There is. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the effect display device 70. A predetermined effective line (not shown) is provided on the decorative pattern display unit 700.
Three rows of display areas (left symbol display area Z1, middle symbol display area Z2, right symbol display area Z3), which are variable display areas for decorative symbols, are provided above, and correspond to the left symbol display area Z1. The middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left symbol and the middle symbol display area Z2 of the decorative symbol, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right symbol display area Z3 are stopped and displayed, respectively. On the hold image display unit 710, a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol and a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol are displayed. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence of the activated reserved balls of the special symbol (entry order), and the maximum of 4 reserved images of the 1st special symbol and the maximum 4 reserved images of the 2nd special symbol are displayed. It can be displayed. Further, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the currently executing variable display is displayed.

The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a flow path for a game ball, protection of an effect screen, and decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that executes an effect operation according to the development status of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. Further, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the development state of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “directing lamp LP”.

Subsequently, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, a back set board 30 based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape that is slightly smaller than the front frame 2 and has a window that communicates back and forth in the center is above and below. It is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so that it can be opened and closed and detached from the side. A rectangular box-shaped back set cover 30C with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is always arranged so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 is connected to the storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, the tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and the right end of the tank rail 32, and downward. A prize for guiding the game ball paid out from the ball supply passage unit 33, the prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out the game ball guided by the ball supply passage part 33, and the game ball paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 that comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko game machine PM, a production control board 200 that controls the overall production, image display according to the game development, and sound effect control. An image control board 300, etc., for performing the above are attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, the payout control board 400 that controls the launch and payout of the game ball, and the power is received from the game facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic parts. An external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) that outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the power supply board 500 and the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30. Arranged. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine PM can be operated.

<Control configuration of pachinko game machines>
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs, various data, and the like, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and a buffer memory that serves as a temporary storage area, and peripheral boards and each. It is equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured to include an I / O port circuit 104 that inputs and outputs signals to and from the device, and the main CPU 101 plays a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to perform key controls on progress. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 has a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and resets the main CPU 101 when it malfunctions or goes out of control. It operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit that restores the normal state, the CTC circuit that enables the generation of real-time interrupts and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101, and generates a predetermined random number (built-in random number). It is equipped with a random number generation circuit and the like, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 executes various processes related to the main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch and the like. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as stack pointers and registers held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off, and is used when the power is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored). ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information in the backup area.

Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large winning opening switch 541, the left general winning opening switch 611, the right general winning opening switch 641 and the like. The detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special symbol hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a normal symbol hold lamp. In addition to being electrically connected to the 76, it is electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 are transmitted via the I / O port circuit 104. It is transmitted to the display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits a game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. The external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the game machine PM based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via, for example, the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. It is possible to connect, and various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. It is not possible to transmit data from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and it is not possible to request the main control board 100 to transmit data.

The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores the effect control program and various data, a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, and the like. It is equipped with a production control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured to include a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute the main control related to the game production according to the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 is reset when the sub-main CPU 201, which is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, malfunctions or goes out of control. WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, for inputting / outputting serial data It is equipped with serial communication circuits and the like, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The effect control board 200 is an image control command for instructing an image and sound to the image control board 300 and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91 in the effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100. (Ramp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and while image control commands related to images and sounds are transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, as a response, the effect control board 200 is transmitted. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is transmitted via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 adopt clock-synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off the switch in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Therefore, the drive current is supplied or cut off to the effect lamp LP to control the effect lamp LP to be turned on or off.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching the switch in the circuit on / off based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, it is shut off to control the operation of each movable accessory 24. A parallel communication method is adopted for data transmission to the motor driver 92.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image production based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores an image control program, various data, and the like, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. It is equipped with an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured to include a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. , The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute the main control related to the image production according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 has a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301, and the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, which reads image data stored in an image ROM in response to an instruction from a sub-sub CPU 301, processes the image data, and transmits a video signal (image data) generated by image processing to an effect display device. A high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read from the image ROM is connected to this VDP. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the audio ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by synthesizing the acoustic data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be able to communicate in both directions, and is controlled to drive the prize ball payout unit 34 to pay out the prize balls based on the payout control command from the main control board 100. Is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the launching handle 12 to control the launching of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board and a backup power supply based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island. It is configured to include a backup power supply circuit for generating power and a power supply cutoff monitoring circuit for monitoring power supply cutoff due to a voltage drop, and is a power supply required for electronic / electrical parts such as each control board and amusement equipment. To supply. A power switch for activating the power circuit is connected to the power supply board 500, and assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power supply switch is turned on, the power supply board A predetermined power supply is supplied to each control board or the like from the normal power supply circuit of 500. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island is cut off, and when the power supply disconnection is detected, the power supply disconnection signal (NMI signal) for notifying the fact is sent to the main control board 100. , Transmission to the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island to the pachinko game machine PM. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value is connected to the power supply board 500 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the game machine PM based on the game information signal from the main control board 100. The external information signals that the external information terminal plate 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine include, for example, a jackpot signal, a continuous villa signal, a symbol confirmation signal, a prize ball signal (also referred to as a prize ball information signal), and a door. It includes a frame opening signal, a security signal (also referred to as a security information signal), a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal and the like. Further, the external device installed outside the game machine PM includes a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device installed above the gaming machine PM and displaying data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each game machine (this game machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal output from each game machine installed in the hall in the game store, and each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the game machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the game machine PM without going through a data display.

<Basic operation of pachinko game machines>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked before being used for the game. The game is started by storing the game balls in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the launch handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 8 are sent out to the launch mechanism 14 one by one by the ball feed mechanism 13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame 5. It is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated with less than a predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side region PA2 and flows down the left side region PA1. In this left side region PA1, a left side flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the first starting port 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63 is formed. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side region PA2 and flows down the right side region PA2. In the right side region PA2, a right side flow path for allowing the game ball to flow down toward the operating gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the large winning opening 54 is formed. The game balls flowing down the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA2 in this way have the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operating gate 53 according to the paths distributed in the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA1. , The large winning opening 54 and the general winning opening 61 to 64 can be entered, but if the ball is not entered in any of the winning openings, the ball is flowed down to the out opening 29.

When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any of the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, the large winning opening 54, and the general winning opening 61-63, a prize is given according to the type of the winning opening. The ball is paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, as the number of prize balls (referred to as "unit number of prize balls") to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning opening, the first starting port 51 is "4" and the second. The starting opening 52 is set to "1", the general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to "3", and the large winning opening 54 is set to "15". The number of unit prize balls in each winning opening is not limited to that illustrated in the present embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit prize balls, the first starting port 51 may be "1" instead of "4". Further, the second starting port 52 may be "3" instead of "1". Further, the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be "5" instead of "3". Further, the large winning opening may be "10" instead of "15".

When the game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, a lottery random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as an operation holding ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined start condition (a change start condition of a special symbol described later) is satisfied, a hit / fail determination, a symbol determination, and a variation pattern determination of the special symbol are performed on the lottery random value related to the earliest operation holding ball. In the mode according to the determination result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable time according to the selected variable pattern.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, the game shifts to a special game (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this big hit game, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the big winning opening 54 is changed to the open state only once or a plurality of times. When a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the large winning opening 54 reaches the opening time limit, the round game being executed ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, an embodiment in which three types of symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating the jackpot, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the jackpot games.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined jackpot is won, the probability variation function of the special symbol may be activated from the end of the jackpot game until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined final number of times. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (big hit game) will occur relatively early. Become. The probability fluctuation function of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the predetermined final number of times, "10000 times" may be set, which substantially corresponds to the number of variable display times until the next big hit occurs.

In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be activated in association with or independently of the probability variation function of the special symbol. When the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the average variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lottery per unit time is improved (big hit per unit time). Ease of acquisition can be increased).

Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the electric chew support function (also simply referred to as "electric support") may be activated in association with or independently of the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The electric chew support function enhances the ease of entering the second starting port 52 by operating the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522. It is a state (also referred to as a "easy-to-enter state"). When the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. When the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time is more likely to increase than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 52 is also increased. Therefore, the player goes to the second starting port 52. It also increases the possibility that the number of balls entered will increase. Therefore, by operating the electric chew support function, the chances of getting a prize ball by entering the second starting port 52 during that period increase, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game with almost no reduction in the number of balls held. Become. That is, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls of the game ball, becomes high. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chew support function is operating is also referred to as a “high base state”, and the state in which the electric chew support function is not operating is also referred to as a “low base state”.

<Main functional configurations of pachinko machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 4. Note that FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200).

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, and a normal symbol lottery processing means 145. Includes special game control means 150, symbol display control means 155, electric accessory control means 160, game state control means 165, error monitoring control means 170, main information storage means 180, and command transmission / reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means on the main control board 100 is composed of hardware such as a main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

The ball entry determination means 110 is based on detection signals from the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531 and the large prize opening switch 541, the general prize opening switch 611, 641, and the like, and each winning opening. Judge the entry of the game ball into. When the ball entry determination means 110 detects the entry of a game ball by the first start port switch 511, the ball entry determination means 110 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "first start port winning command") to that effect, and the first 2 When the entry of the game ball is detected by the start port switch 521, an effect control command (referred to as "the second start port winning command") indicating that fact is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 of the game ball When the passage is detected, an effect control command (referred to as "operation gate winning command") indicating that fact is generated, and when the large winning opening switch 541 detects the entry of the game ball, it indicates that fact. When a production control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated and a game ball entry is detected by the left general winning opening switch 611, a directing control command indicating that fact ("left general winning opening") (Referred to as "winning command") is generated, and when the right general winning opening switch 611 detects the entry of a game ball, an effect control command (referred to as "right general winning opening winning command") is generated to that effect. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The game lottery random number generating means 120 is used for a winning / losing lottery of a special symbol by taking in a built-in random number generated by a random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding a soft random number per special symbol described later to the built-in random number. Generate a random number per special symbol. Further, the game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, the initial value for a new update after one cycle of the special symbol soft random number added to the above-mentioned built-in random number for the hit random number generation and the special symbol soft random number update is completed. Soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining, special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the hit symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number Special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for new update after one cycle of update is completed, special symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, Random numbers per ordinary symbol to be used for winning / failing lottery of ordinary symbols, initial value random numbers per ordinary symbol to determine the initial value for new updates after one cycle of random numbers per ordinary symbol is completed, Ordinary symbol variation pattern Random numbers for use in selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are included. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random numbers are updated while the timer interrupt process is not executed (the initial value random numbers are not executed). (During loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

The special symbol holding control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, which is a random number value per special symbol, per special symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52. The symbol random value and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value are acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means in which the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is combined with the entry order of the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces). Temporarily stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of 180.

In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area) and the hold 2 storage area (2) are in the order of entry into the starting ports 51 and 52. A third reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided. Each hold storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a random number of special symbol variation patterns as a set of operation hold ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage. It is digested in the order of areas (first-in, first-out principle). When the reserved ball information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved ball information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage area, respectively. Hold 4 Clear the contents of the storage area to zero.

Further, the special symbol holding control means 131 has a first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol hold ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one of the special symbol's operation-holding balls is acquired as an update process of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol, and one operation-holding ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

Further, when the special symbol hold control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command (“symbol memory”) including the update information of the hold ball number A number command) is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. As a general rule, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol are digested in the order in which they are entered, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. , So-called priority digestion is adopted, so that while the operation holding ball related to the second special symbol game exists, the operation holding related to the second special symbol game is held regardless of the existence of the operation holding ball related to the first special symbol game. It is configured to preferentially digest the sphere. In addition, under this priority digestion, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation holding ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is digested. It will be put on hold.

The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, which is a random number value per normal symbol, a symbol random value value per normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operating gate 53. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation holding ball information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 stores the normal symbol operation hold ball information up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 in the form of being combined with the ball entry order of the hold balls. Temporarily memorize. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operating holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one of the normal symbol hold balls is acquired as the process of updating the number of hold balls of the normal symbol, and one action hold ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

When the pre-determination means 135 acquires an operation-holding ball with a special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing, the pre-determination means 135 executes a pre-determination for pre-reading notice for the operation-holding ball. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-judgment timing, when (1) waiting for a hit and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and Either when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is operating, or when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit. It is time to meet the conditions. The above-mentioned pre-judgment timing is an example, and the pre-judgment timing is changed according to the specifications of the game machine (for example, it has a start port related to the second special symbol that does not have an ordinary electric accessory, and eight pieces are normally reserved. For models that can store, the above (1) can be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc.), or even if a specification that makes a preliminary judgment at any time without setting a pre-judgment timing is adopted. Good. Further, in each game state, only the operation-holding ball of the special symbol that is the subject of the game may be the target of the pre-judgment. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is the target of the pre-judgment. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state, it is preferable that only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is the target of the preliminary determination. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation hold ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether or not the result is correct. Pre-judgment (pre-judgment of hit / fail), pre-judgment of symbol (pre-judgment of symbol), and pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern (pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although the pre-judgment table used in each pre-judgment is not shown, the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers in each of the hit / fail pre-judgment table, the symbol pre-judgment table, and the variation pattern pre-judgment table is divided into a plurality of areas. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the pre-judgment (also referred to as a "pre-judgment number")) is assigned to each of these areas (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination is based on the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (result of winning / failing determination, result of symbol determination, result of variation pattern determination). The winning / failing pre-determination table, the symbol pre-determining table, and the like may be the same as the winning / failing lottery table and the symbol lottery table used for the lottery when the fluctuation is actually started. Here, in the fluctuation pattern pre-determination table, there is a possibility that the game status at the start of fluctuation (whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a time reduction, whether or not it is during a limited frequency period that refers to a special table, the number of reserved balls, etc.) may change. Therefore, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included. Further, as a modification, it is configured to predetermine a random value such as a register on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area. You may. Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a "pre-determination command") including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / failing determination means 141, a special symbol stop symbol determining means 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determining means 143. When the change start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 is set in the earliest storage area (hold 1 storage area) of the special symbol hold storage area in the main information storage means 180. The stored random value per special symbol, random value per special symbol, and special symbol variation pattern random value are read out and used as the special symbol hit / fail determination area, special symbol symbol determination area, and special symbol variation pattern of the main information storage means 180. Store each in the judgment area. Here, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is satisfied" means that (A1) the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (A3). ) When all the conditions that the operation holding ball of the first special symbol exists is satisfied. In addition, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol is satisfied" means that (B1) the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (B3). It is when all the conditions that the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists is satisfied. When the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is preferentially processed under the above-mentioned priority digestion. To do.

The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 reads a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol winning / failing determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a winning / failing determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of big hit, small hit, and miss. Decide if you want to. The result of this hit / fail judgment is temporarily stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H"), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 holds a special symbol winning / failing lottery table that is referred to at the time of this winning / failing determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table. FIG. 5 (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and FIG. 5 (B) is a gaming state (high probability) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. State). In the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the winning / failing determination of the special symbol, the random value per special symbol corresponds to the range of "0 to 204" in the gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated. In the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, a big hit is obtained when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 1506". That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1 / 319.69" to the high probability "1 / 43.49". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the game state, but the jackpot winning probability is set equally between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special symbol. The winning probability of a small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 uses the first special symbol jackpot symbol table and the second special symbol jack symbol table and the second, which are referred to when determining the jackpot symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the activation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means the special symbol after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the activation of the probability fluctuation function of.

In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a probabilistic game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", and ( 2) The gaming state in which the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol's probability fluctuation function operating is called the "time saving state" or "time saving gaming state", and (3) all The state in which the function is not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state" and the "time saving game state" are more advantageous game states for the player than the "normal game state". Therefore, in the following, the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are also referred to as "advantageous gaming states" as the gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In addition, each gaming state is determined by the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state) (1). ) Probability variation game state can be expressed as "high probability high base state", (2) time saving game state can be expressed as "low probability high base state", and (3) normal game state can be expressed as "low probability low base state". In addition, the operating state of the probability fluctuation function is a high probability state, while the operating state of the electric chew support function is a low base state (a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the "normal gaming state"). One) may be provided, such a gaming state may be referred to as a latent gaming state, and this latent gaming state may be expressed as a “high probability low base state”. This latent game state (“high probability low base state”) is a game state suitable for performing a game mainly with a small hit, and the details will be described later. Regarding these states (combination state of low probability / high probability and low base / high base), unless otherwise specified, the game state (hit / fail judgment and fluctuation display are possible) in a state during which the jackpot is not in progress or in the small hit. (State), but during the big hit, it is a low probability low base state, and during the small hit, it is the same game state as the game state at the time of winning the small hit. At this time, the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is at least the main player of the game in the game state, is shortened. Means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the function for shortening the variation time of the special symbol is activated, at least the variation time of the first special symbol (normal game state) in the game state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main game (normal game state) In the game state (probability variation game state, latent probability game state, time-saving game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game, the variation time (average variation time) of at least the second special symbol is shortened. Time) is shortened.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (1) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (2) game at the time of big hit winning. Determined according to the condition. The number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes are displayed) is the number of times the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated (referred to as the "probability fluctuation number") and the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated. It is set according to the number of times (referred to as the "number of times of shortening the fluctuation time") and the number of times the electric chew support function is activated (referred to as the "number of times of electric support"). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol start the operation at the same time and end the operation at the same time. Therefore, the "variation time reduction number" and the "electric support number" are the same number of times. (Therefore, in FIG. 6, the "number of times of shortening the fluctuation time" and the "number of times of electric support operation" are described in the same column).

FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the symbol random value per special symbol, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of fluctuation time reductions (the number of electric support), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, each round The opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, two types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the two types of jackpots (symbol group) are divided into 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group A)
When the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000", and the number of electric support is "10000". The probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of. In this probabilistic game state, a huge number of times of continuation (probability fluctuation number, fluctuation time shortening number, electric support number) is set as "10000 times", and the jackpot is not won until the continuation number is reached. Is not probabilistic (winning at about 1/44), so it will continue until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group B)
When the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the number of electric support is "100". The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the symbol random value per special symbol, the symbol group, jackpot type, number of probability fluctuations, number of fluctuation time reductions (number of electric support), specified number of rounds of jackpot game, each round The opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the three types of jackpots (symbol group) are divided into 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol group D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: symbol group C)
When the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the probability fluctuation count "10000 times", the fluctuation time shortening count "10000 times", and the electric support count "10000 times" are set, and the jackpot game The probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of. As described above, this probabilistic game state is set to a huge number of times of "10000 times", and continues until the next big hit occurs substantially. In addition, the second special symbol "16R"
When the "specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot 54 in one round game is "29 seconds". In addition, this 16R specific jackpot may be a specification that wins even the first special symbol, and in that case, it is harder to win than the second special symbol (for example, 5% of all jackpot symbols is used, and the first In 1 special symbol, it is preferable that the 16R specific jackpot is 5%, the 4R specific jackpot is 60%, and the 4R normal jackpot is 35%).

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group D)
When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "10000", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "10000", and the number of electric support is "10000". The probabilistic game state is set as the game state after the end of. As described above, this probabilistic game state is set to a huge number of times of "10000 times", and continues until the next big hit occurs substantially. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group E)
When the 2nd special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the number of probability fluctuations is "0", the number of fluctuation time reductions is "100", and the number of electric support is "100". The time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within the 100 times. When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the jackpot 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

Here, in the present embodiment, there are three types of jackpots: 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpot (symbol groups A and D), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol groups B and E). Has been done. The expected value of winning a prize ball in a special game (referred to as "expected value of winning a prize ball") is 16R specific jackpot> 4R specific jackpot = 4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual number of rounds of the special game when the big hit is won in the first special symbol is "4 rounds", whereas the actual number of rounds of the special game when the big hit is won in the second special symbol is "4 rounds". Since it is "16 rounds", there is a higher possibility of shifting to a special game with a large number of rounds when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol than in the case where a big hit occurs in the first special symbol. It is advantageous for the player in that he can get the ball out. The actual number of rounds of this special game corresponds to the number of executions of the "long open round game" set for the special game. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is a fixed time of 29 seconds (although all rounds are referred to as "long opening round games"), but a predetermined round during the same jackpot game. Alternatively, in all rounds, a "short open round game" that shortens the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 to 2 seconds is provided so that even if the number of rounds of the big hit game is the same, the balls are substantially released. A configuration having a jackpot with a different number of rounds that can be obtained (a jackpot with a different number of actual rounds) may be adopted. In the long opening round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified count number (full count = 10 balls) of game balls can be inserted into the large winning opening 54 or easily entered. It is a round game. In the short open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified number of game balls (full count = 10 balls) cannot be entered or difficult to enter in the large winning opening 54. It is a game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects any variation pattern table from a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern selection state and the fluctuation pattern table will be described later. Each fluctuation pattern table defines a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. In each figure, "selectivity" is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, a judgment value (range of random values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which determination value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. It is premised that various fluctuation patterns are associated with a fluctuation time for each fluctuation pattern as an end condition for the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and that the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is also executed at the fluctuation time. ..

Here, the fluctuation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, a "normal selection state", a "time saving selection state", and a "probability variation selection state" are set as a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a variation pattern selection state set in response to a gaming state (normal gaming state) in which none of the special symbol probability variation function, variation time shortening function, and electric chew support function is operating. In the time saving selection state, the variation set according to the gaming state (time saving gaming state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated, but the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated. The pattern is selected. The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set corresponding to the gaming state (probability variation game state) in which all of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are operating.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation-holding balls ("hold 0", "hold 1-2", "hold 3") described in each figure is the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol. It means the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after hold-digestion), and if it is a variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (after hold-digestion) The number of operation-holding balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of lottery of the fluctuation pattern (at the start of the fluctuation display / after the hold-digestion) (excluding the operation-holding balls digested by the variation display). .. As a modification thereof, the total value of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

The variation effect of the decorative symbol performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a reference, FIGS. 7 to 9 also describe the contents of the fluctuation effect set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening fluctuation", "shortening fluctuation", and "normal fluctuation" are effects in which the three rows of decorative symbols fluctuate and become "off" in so-called disjointed eyes without going through the reach state even once. Is. In the following, ultra-shortening fluctuation, shortening fluctuation, and normal fluctuation are collectively referred to as "non-reach off". The non-reach out-of-reach types differ from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter time for the shortened variation than for the normal variation and for the ultra-shortened variation than for the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state in which the same decorative symbol is stopped in two rows (generally the left column and the right column) of the three rows of decorative symbols (reach state), and the remaining one row (general). If different decorative symbols stop in the middle row), it will be "missing", and if the same decorative symbol stops in the remaining one row (generally, the middle row), it will be a "big hit".

"SP Reach (Super Reach)" is a reach production with a relatively higher expectation of big hits than the above N Reach, and evolved from N Reach after the establishment of the reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live-action. Etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to C are prepared as the types of SP reach. The SP reach A is a reach effect executed when the currently executing gaming state is the normal state. The SP reach B is a reach effect executed when the currently executing gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. The SP reach C is a reach effect executed when the currently executing gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state. In the variation pattern type of this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher in the order of "non-reach" <"N reach" <"SP reach". As a modification, the effect content of the SP reach may be the same (SP reach A) in the normal state and the time-saving game state, and a different SP reach (SP reach C) may be used in the probabilistic game state. Further, as another modification, a variation pattern including a pseudo-ream may be prepared. Pseudo-ream means that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variated during the one-time variable display of the decorative symbol, so that the variable display is performed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner. (Pseudo-continuous production, pseudo-variation effect, pseudo-continuous variation effect, re-variation effect). That is, the pseudo-ream is an effect of executing the pseudo-variation in which the temporary stop or the fixed stop is executed a plurality of times after all the decorative symbols in the three rows start to change or re-change. It is shown that the larger the number of pseudo-reams (the number of pseudo-variations), the higher the possibility of developing SP reach with high expectation of big hits.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the normal selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 1 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortening variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortening fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 One of (SP reach A) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is based on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol increases. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation time is relative without depending on the number of operation-holding balls (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the second special symbol. The variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation) or PH1-2 (normal variation) set to be short is selected. As a modified example, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", only the main fluctuation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened fluctuation is selected regardless of the number of pending operations of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation may be configured to be the easiest to select (preferably, the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol).

Fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected regardless of the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time saving selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 2 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for deviation. .. Here, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is incorrect, the fluctuation pattern PH2- does not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). One of 2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach A) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is selected regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol. There is no such thing. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 One of (SP reach B) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination is based on the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol (0 / 1-2 / 3). The table contents of are set to be different, and even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening variation) is not selected, and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists. In this case, the larger the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the easier it is for the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) to be selected.

Fluctuation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected regardless of the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the probability variation selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol.

Fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set in the variation pattern table 3 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation pattern PH3- does not depend on the number of balls on hold for operation (0 / 1-2 / 3) of the first special symbol. 2 (normal variation) or PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is incorrect, the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is selected regardless of the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol. There is no such thing. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is incorrect, one of the fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PH3-2 (normal fluctuation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. Will be done. At this time, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is incorrect, the reference destination is according to the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (for details, depending on the presence or absence of the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol). The table contents of are set to be different, and even if the acquired special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation) is not selected, and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists. Since the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation) can be selected only when the second special symbol is present, the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is present rather than the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is not present. This tends to make it easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time.

A variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected without depending on the big hit type (4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Similarly, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) does not depend on the big hit type (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Be selected.

As described above, the variation pattern tables 1 to 3 specify the variation time of the special symbol for each variation pattern, but regardless of which variation pattern is selected, the determination stop time (determination) of the special symbol is specified. The display time) is set to "0.5 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbol is the time during which the special symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the fluctuation time and the fixed stop time of the special symbol. Further, in the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 3, the same effect content and fluctuation time may be obtained at the time of the big hit and at the time of the miss, but it is preferable that the final effect content is different between the time of the big hit and the time of the loss. In other words, even if the N reach is the same, the decorative pattern will be doublet (example: "7, 7, 7") at the time of big hit, while the decorative pattern will be out of reach (example: "7.8") at the time of off.・ 7 ”), or even if the SP reach A to C is the same, at the time of a big hit, the final production content will be the production content indicating success, and the decorative pattern will be doublet (example: ally character wins the enemy character) , After that, "7, 7, 7" is displayed), but when it is off, the final production content becomes the production content indicating failure and the decorative pattern is out of reach (example: ally character is an enemy character) It is preferable that the player is defeated and then "7, 8, 7" is displayed). In addition, it is preferable that the fluctuation time (production time) is longer than that at the time of big hit, even if the production content is the same (when the same SP reach is developed), as an example. It is preferable that the SP reach A to C at the time of a big hit has a fluctuation time (effect time) that is 10 seconds longer than that of the SP reach A to C at the time of a miss.

After the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects the variation pattern of the special symbol, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol. Therefore, is communication with the effect control board 200 performed normally? Effect control command (communication inspection command) to confirm whether or not, effect control command (variation addition information specification command) including variation addition pattern of special symbol (information for adding and subtracting variation time), variation pattern of special symbol Generate production control commands (variable pattern specification commands) that include information, effect control commands (symbol specification commands) that include information on character production numbers (symbols and game states), etc. (Hereafter, these commands are collectively referred to as " (Referred to as "variation start command"), which is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol winning / failing determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. When the change start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the random value per normal symbol and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the earliest storage area in the normal symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the normal symbol hit / miss determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "conditions for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol" are (1) waiting for the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and (2) the existence of the operation holding ball of the normal symbol. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state in which the fluctuation can be started (a state in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

The normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146 reads a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit / fail determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol, and the determination result is either "hit" or "miss". Determine if this is the case. The result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in the subsequent processing, and then cleared when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The ordinary symbol winning / failing determination means 146 holds a non-illustrated ordinary symbol winning / failing lottery table that is referred to when determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct. The hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1/3001" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is activated. If it is, it is set to "2999/3001".

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and when the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is a hit, the predetermined hit symbol (the trigger for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate). On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is incorrect, a predetermined missing symbol (a stop symbol that does not trigger the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, the symbol A and the symbol B are assigned as the hit symbols of the normal symbol, while the symbol C is assigned as the outlier symbol of the normal symbol.

The ordinary symbol variation pattern determining means 148 reads the ordinary symbol variation pattern random value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and also refers to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table (not shown) to refer to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table. Determine (variation time). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol). Is set to "0.2 seconds" when is operating. Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in the control of the normal symbol, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, when the electric chew support function is not operating, the hit probability of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is set to "0" and the normal symbol is set. It is also conceivable to adopt a specification in which the fluctuation time of is single.

Further, the ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 according to the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 holds an ordinary electric accessory opening pattern table that is referred to when determining an opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is set. If it is operating, "5.8 seconds" is set. The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 may be different depending on the type of the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol. For example, when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, if the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol is symbol A, "3 seconds open x 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds) ", and if the hit symbol of the normal symbol is symbol B," 2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5) .8 seconds) ".

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo according to the determined jackpot type (symbol group). Determine the execution time (round time) of the round game. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute the effect control command (referred to as "big hit start demo command") and the jackpot end demo effect. An effect control command (referred to as a “big hit end demo command”) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The jackpot start demo command is also an opportunity for the effect control board 200 side to determine the content of a series of jackpot start demo effects (big hit start demo effect, round effect, jackpot end demo effect) developed during the jackpot game. Become. Further, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the big hit game. , This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds and information on opening and closing of the grand prize opening 54. As will be described later in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is uniformly set to 5 seconds, and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is uniformly set to 20 seconds, but the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo are uniformly set to 20 seconds. Regarding the execution time (demo time) of the end demo, not only the jackpot type (symbol group) but also the jackpot start demo and jackpot even if the same jackpot type (symbol group) is used depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The execution time (demo time) of the end demo may be different. For example, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special symbol, for the 4R normal jackpot, if the jackpot is hit in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (as a jackpot start demo production). , "Normal jackpot start" is displayed as the effect A-1), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 15 seconds (as the jackpot end demo effect, the effect B-1 and prepaid that are displayed as "time saving mode rush" are executed. While using a card (* a storage medium in which information about the amount of money required to borrow a game ball for a game is stored) to call attention to forgetting to take it), a high probability high base state or a low probability When a big hit is made in a high base state, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (the production A-1 is executed as the big hit start demo production), and the execution time of the big hit end demo is 10 seconds (as the big hit end demo production). Production B-1 is executed, and production C is not executed). For 16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot, if a jackpot is hit in a low probability low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (big hit start demo). As a production, the production A-2 that is displayed as "probability change jackpot start" is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds (the production B-2 that is displayed as "probability change mode entry" as the jackpot end demo production). And the effect C is executed), while the big hit in the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (the effect A-2 is executed as the big hit start demo effect). Then, the execution time of the jackpot end demo may be 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demo effect, the effect B-3 displayed as "probability change mode continuation" is executed, and the effect C is not executed). In addition, assuming that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special symbol, if it is a jackpot in the first special symbol, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is 5 seconds (16R specific jackpot) regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot. 4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot is 5 seconds, and as a jackpot start demo effect, production A-1 or production A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 30 seconds (16R specific jackpot and 16R specific jackpot and For the 4R specific jackpot, it takes 30 seconds to execute production B-2 and production C as the jackpot end demo production. However, for the 4R normal jackpot, it takes 15 seconds, and as the jackpot end demo production, production B-1 and production C are performed. On the other hand, if it is a big hit with the second special symbol, the execution time of the big hit start demo is 5 seconds (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit, regardless of the game state at the time of big hit. 5 seconds, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is 20 seconds (16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot is 20 seconds, and the jackpot end demo is executed). As the effect, the effect B-3 is executed and the effect C is not executed. However, the 4R normal jackpot may be set to 10 seconds, and the effect B-1 may be executed and the effect C may not be executed as the big hit end demo effect). .. The relationship between the time values is an example, and if the magnitude relationship of each demo time in each situation is the same as above, the relationship is not limited to this time value. Further, in any of the above specifications, the effect C does not occur when a big hit is made in the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, but during the fluctuation related to the big hit or during the big hit game (during the special game). When the power is cut off and the power is cut off during the fluctuation or the big hit game, the effect C may be generated exceptionally.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 71 to variably display the first special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the fluctuation display. Let me. Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol display device 72 to variably display the second special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the fluctuation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). Generates an effect control command (referred to as "fluctuation stop command"). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 75 to variably display the normal symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and confirms and displays the normal symbol after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

Further, the special symbol display control means 156 issues an effect control command (referred to as "standby demo command") that triggers the execution of the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) when the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. "The interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer" means that the period during which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed continues for a predetermined time or longer. If the period in which the game ball is not launched continues for a predetermined time or longer, or if the period in which the game ball is not entered in all the winning openings continues for a predetermined time or longer, the game is interrupted for a predetermined time or longer. It may be a continuous specification.

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after confirming the special symbol, and outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543. The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is set as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a large winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessory 542 (that is, the number of running rounds). Here, the operation end condition (end condition of the unit game) of the special electric accessory 542 in the big hit game is that a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enters the big winning opening 54. That is, or the opening time of the large winning opening 54 has reached the maximum opening time (“29 seconds” in this embodiment).

Further, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 when the result of the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol corresponds to a hit, and the ordinary electric accessory 522 (No. 1) for a predetermined opening time. 2 Opening and closing control of the starting port 52) is performed. Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the normal electric accessory 522 for 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. Then, in the high base state in which the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the second starting port 52, or that the second starting port 52 has. The opening time has reached the maximum opening time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

When the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the game state control means 165 is based on the big hit type (type of symbol group) and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The game state after the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, as a plurality of types of gaming states, a normal gaming state (low probability low base state), a time saving gaming state (low probability low base state), and a probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state) are used. It is set, and one of a plurality of types of gaming states is selectively set. Since each game state has already been described in detail, duplicate description will be omitted here.

Further, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type (type of symbol group) when the jackpot game is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game. Switch the variable pattern selection state of. In the present embodiment, a normal selection state, a time saving selection state, and a probability variation selection state are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, depending on the determined game state, jackpot type, number of variation display times of special symbols, and the like. Therefore, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is selectively set. Since each fluctuation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, duplicate description will be omitted here.

Further, the game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores the command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, and the like. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to the effect control board 200 in order to indicate the error state effect. Although the description is omitted in FIG. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is a means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called fraudulent gaming activities.

The main information storage means 180 includes random number value information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and a game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game. Information on shortening function, electric chew support function), information on variable pattern selection status, result information of hit / fail judgment of special symbols and ordinary symbols (big hit, miss), stop symbols related to special symbols and ordinary symbols (including symbol group) Information, information on fluctuation patterns (including fluctuation addition patterns) of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on jackpot games (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of opening times per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, It is configured to temporarily store the status information indicating the operating state of 72, the status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, the information of the effect control command data, and the like, and a predetermined storage for storing each information. It has an area.

The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is received. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE data is "1". Bit7 of EVENT data is set to "0". When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted as one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 includes the effect lottery random number generation means 210, the effect control means 220, the lamp control means 230, the accessory control means 240, the error effect control means 250, the sub-main information storage means 260, and the command. The transmission / reception means 270 is included. Each of the above-mentioned means on the effect control board 200 is composed of hardware such as a sub-main CPU 201, ROM 202, RAM 203, and an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional representation of something.

The effect lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include a look-ahead lottery random number used for the lottery of the look-ahead effect, a decorative symbol random number used for the lottery of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a variable effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the variable effect pattern of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect. It includes a notice lottery random number used for the lottery, a big hit effect pattern random number used for the lottery of the big hit effect pattern, and a stage lottery random number used for the transition lottery of the effect stage. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the main processing on the production control side, which will be described later (when the production control command is not received from the main control board 100). To do.

The effect controlling means 220 includes the effect mode control means 221, the hold information display control means 222, the look-ahead notice control means 223, the variable effect control means 224, the decorative symbol control means 225, the notice effect control means 226, and the special game effect control means 227. Including.

The effect mode control means 221 is based on a game state designation command from the main control board 100, and is consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. (Also referred to as "game production mode") is controlled. In the present embodiment, "normal effect mode", "time saving effect mode", and "probability variation effect mode" are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and the gaming state (or fluctuation pattern) managed on the main control board 100 side is set. One of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to the selected state), the number of times of variation display of the special symbol, and the like, and the variation effect according to the set effect mode is executed. In the present embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal effect mode" is set, and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving effect mode" is set, and the game state is the probabilistic game state. In some cases, the "probability change effect mode" is set. When any of the effect modes is set, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen as an effect (variable effect) that suggests that the user is staying in the effect mode. ) Is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

The hold information display control means 222 provides a first hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, and a second hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation hold balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested, the value of the corresponding counter is updated (subtracted). Further, the hold information display control means 222 displays the number of hold images of the first special symbol on the hold image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to and the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of operation-held balls of the second special symbol. Further, in the hold information display control means 222, the operation hold ball (the earliest operation hold ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is digested in the changing image display area 720 of the effect display device 70. , Controls to display the changing image displayed by switching to the holding image corresponding to the operation holding ball. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as "reserved image" without distinction, and are referred to as the changing image of the first special symbol. It may be simply referred to as a "changing image" without distinguishing it from the changing image of the second special symbol.

The look-ahead notice control means 223 executes a look-ahead determination (referred to as "look-ahead lottery") with respect to the operation-holding ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is a so-called continuous advance notice effect that announces the possibility of a big hit or a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect) over one or more fluctuation displays before the operation hold ball to be read ahead is digested. It occurs as one aspect. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command from the main control board 100. Here, when the pre-reading advance notice control means 223 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the pre-determination result information of the first special symbol and the pre-determination result information of the second special symbol, respectively. Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) is temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the entry order of the operation holding balls. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the hold storage area of the main control board 100, and the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), in the order of entry into the starting ports 51 and 52, A hold 2 storage area (second hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided, respectively. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of pre-determination of success / failure, information on the result of pre-determination of symbols, and information on the result of pre-determination of fluctuation patterns as a set. The information of the preliminary determination result is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 It is digested in the order of storage area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the information of the preliminary determination result of the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the information of the preliminary determination result stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is stored in the lower numbered storage area, respectively. At the same time as shifting, the contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

The variation effect control means 224 is based on the information (variation pattern information, variation addition information, etc.) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, and the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. ) Is determined by lottery. The variation effect control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol, and the variation pattern of the special symbol from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. A variation effect pattern table corresponding to (variation time) is selected. Here, while the main fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for example, "SP reach A" or "SP reach B") is determined on the main control board 100 side, the effect control board 200 side is based on the main fluctuation pattern. Sub-variable patterns of decorative patterns (for example, "SP reach A1, A2 ...", "SP reach A2, A3 ...", etc.) that define the scenario of the effect display process in detail are determined. The variation display pattern of the decorative symbol defines a variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation, and a notice is given at each stage in the display process. The timing of generating the effect is also defined as the time schedule. In addition, regarding the variation effect pattern of this decorative symbol, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even if the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect modes during the stay are different, they are produced mutually. Variable production patterns with different contents can be selected. That is, the variable effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during the stay.

Further, the variation effect control means 224 receives the standby demo command from the main control board 100, and after receiving the standby demo command, until the variation display of the special symbol is started (the next variation start). During the customer waiting period (until the command is received), for example, a standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) for reproducing a moving image for demonstration is executed.

The decorative symbol control means 225 is decorated based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the above variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of stop symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by, for example, identification elements composed of numbers and the like. Further, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as "stop symbol pattern") is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for jackpots, a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a missed symbol (missing symbol)". The jackpot symbol indicating the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three identical odd-numbered symbols are aligned. The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2.2.2") in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned. The out-of-order symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "1.3.8") in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol having a number different from the other numbers. Here, among the out-of-reach symbols, the out-of-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "3.1.3") in which only the middle symbol is displaced back and forth by several frames while the left symbol and the right symbol match. Become. In the case of a small hit symbol or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, it may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7". In addition, when the lottery result is out of reach, a specific result called a so-called "chance eye" (for example, "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" or "5 ・ 6 ・ 7" as the order), etc. "2, 2, 3", "5, 5, 6", etc.) may be selected as the deviation. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, when a temporary stop display and a re-variable display are performed before the final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, a special symbol (a special symbol as a temporary stop symbol suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-ream) ( Pseudo-continuous pattern) is selected. When displaying a temporary stop symbol that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo-ream, display characters such as "NEXT" for at least one stop symbol (typically a middle symbol) among the three rows of decorative symbols. There is a case (for example, "2, NEXT, 3", etc.) in which a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is replaced and displayed. The stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each of the following variable effect patterns. In this embodiment, in principle, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, if the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and if it is a special variation effect pattern, the right symbol → It is also possible to stop in the order of the middle symbol → the left symbol, and in this case, the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high. In addition, regardless of the stop order, it is desirable that the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol start to change at the same time when the change starts. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

Here, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol attributes of the decorative symbol in the present embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element composed of numbers and a color (display color) attached to the identification element. In the present embodiment, all nine types of numbers "1" to "9" are set as identification elements (that is, there are all nine types of decorative symbols). Each decorative symbol is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the symbol row, and "1" to "" on the effect display device 70
It is cyclically displayed or scrolled in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3 in the order of "9" (or the order of "9" to "1"), and after "9", it returns to "1" again (or "1"). After "", it returns to "9" again). This specification is the same in other embodiments. The symbol attribute of each decorative symbol is determined by the type of color attached to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative symbols are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same symbol attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three types of colors of the decorative pattern are set: "blue", "red", and "gold". In addition, on the drawing, the display mode of three kinds of decorative symbols of "blue", "red", and "gold" is expressed by "white", "diagonal line", and "filled". Specifically, the decorative symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are classified into blue symbol attributes (blue attributes), and the decorative symbols "1", "3", "5", and "9" are classified. "Is classified into a red symbol attribute (red attribute), and the decorative symbol" 7 "is classified into a golden symbol attribute (gold attribute). In the present embodiment, as the symbol attribute of the decorative symbol, the expectation of the ball output and the expectation of the probability change transition are increased by one step in the order of "blue"<"red"<"gold". Hereinafter, for convenience, the decorative symbol having a blue attribute is also referred to as a "blue symbol", the decorative symbol having a red attribute is also referred to as a "red symbol", and the decorative symbol having a golden attribute is also referred to as a "gold symbol".

The advance notice effect control means 226 draws a lottery for the advance notice effect pattern that defines the content of the advance notice effect executed at each stage of the change process of the decorative symbol according to the scenario of the change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. Determined by. The notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, or the like temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and suggests that the jackpot reliability is high, in which the symbol variation stops in the jackpot mode. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including the time when the reach occurs) in the variable display process of the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each notice effect has a different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher expectation of a big hit than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The advance notice effect control means 226 holds the advance notice lottery table referred to when selecting the advance notice effect pattern for each type of advance notice effect, and the advance notice according to the type of the advance notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. The lottery table is selected. As specific types of notice effects, for example, comment notice effects, background notice effects, SU (step-up) notice effects, logo notice effects, mini character notice effects, group notice effects, character notice effects, etc. are prepared. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing one or a plurality of notice effect displays with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is variablely displayed by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice effects.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the content of the jackpot effect (big hit effect pattern) for notifying that the jackpot game is in progress. The jackpot middle production includes a jackpot start demo production that notifies the start of the jackpot game, a round production that notifies that the round game is in progress, and a jackpot end demo production that notifies the end of the jackpot game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, the special game effect control means 227 is based on the jackpot type information stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, and the jackpot medium effect pattern (big hit start demo effect pattern). , Round production pattern, big hit end demo production pattern) is decided. In this jackpot production pattern, a jackpot start demo production time, a round production time (a production time according to the opening pattern of the jackpot 54), and a jackpot end demo production time are set, and along the time axis. A series of production contents are set. Further, the special game effect control means 227 executes the jackpot start demo effect when the jackpot start demo command is received from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and receives the round effect designation command as a trigger. Each round production is executed, and the jackpot end demo production is executed when the jackpot end demo command is received. In the jackpot start demo production, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen to notify the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the jackpot game are displayed. Then, in the jackpot end demo effect, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen to notify the end of the jackpot game, and an effect indicating the game state (mode) to be shifted thereafter is displayed.

As described above, the effect controlling means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined effect contents (look-ahead effect pattern, variable effect pattern, notice effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot effect pattern, etc.). This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 80), and the lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. Is read out, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

The accessory control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) according to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. ..

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. There is.

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative symbol information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and is a predetermined device for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. Contains an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100, executes reception interrupt processing (details will be described later) of the effect control command, and executes various effect control commands in this interrupt process. It is supposed to get. When the strobe signal is received, the command transmission / reception means 270 preferentially performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing of priority level 7 or less described later). ing.

Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to indicate the execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The transmitted image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by the serial communication method. As a general rule, the image control command has a predetermined cycle (500 μ in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.
s) Sent every time. As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation effect pattern. , The notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the effect of the symbol variation at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260.

[Various productions]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PA having such a configuration is configured so that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game and the like. In the following, among various game effects, the contents of the big hit medium effect will be described. In the following, "restricting execution" or "regulating execution" means, for example, not executing all, not executing a part, lowering the priority of display or output, etc. Used as a concept that includes. Further, in the following, "duplicate execution (duplicate execution)" means that one execution period (or execution timing) and the other execution period (or execution timing) overlap, and both executions are executed. It is used in the concept including the case where all the periods (or execution timings) overlap and the case where both execution periods (or execution timings) partially overlap.

[Direction during big hit]
As described above, the jackpot middle production includes a jackpot start demo production, a round production, and a jackpot end demo production. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a jackpot type (type of symbol group), a jackpot symbol combination (combination of decorative symbols when a jackpot occurs), and a jackpot medium effect pattern. (A) in the figure is referred to when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, and (B) in the figure is referred to when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state. .. As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the jackpot symbol combination and the type of the jackpot medium effect pattern are determined according to the jackpot type (symbol group) selected in the special symbol lottery process. In the present embodiment, even if the jackpot types are the same, the type of jackpot symbol combination and the type of jackpot medium effect pattern can be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

The jackpot symbol combination is composed of a combination of stop modes "* ・ * ・ *" in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are arranged (*: decorative symbol of an arbitrary number). The jackpot symbol combination includes "specific jackpots" such as "1.1.1", "3.3.3", "5.5.5", "7/7/7", and "9/9/9". The odd number combination (red symbol combination, gold symbol combination) shown and the "specific jackpot" such as "2.2.2", "44.4", "6/6/6", "8/8/8" It is distinguished from the even-numbered symbol combination (blue symbol combination) indicating "normal jackpot". That is, the odd-numbered symbol combination (gold symbol combination, red symbol combination) is a jackpot symbol combination that confirms that the "specific jackpot" has been won, while the even-numbered symbol combination (blue symbol combination) is the "specific jackpot" and "specific jackpot". It is a jackpot symbol combination in which it is uncertain which jackpot type of "normal jackpot" is won.

The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" and that the player has won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic gaming state. That is, the gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that deterministically notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot), which has the highest degree of advantage among the plurality of jackpot types. It is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds for the red symbol combination is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds", but the player must have won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state. It is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies. It has been confirmed that the actual number of rounds of the blue symbol combination is "4 rounds", but whether it has won the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state, or the "short-time game state" It is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that it is uncertain whether or not the "normal jackpot" that triggers the transition has been won. Here, even if it is a combination of blue symbols, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (that is, even if the actual number of rounds is a probabilistic jackpot of "16 rounds", the blue symbol may be used. The combination may be selected so that the combination can be selected), but it is preferable that the red symbol combination is more likely to have a real number of rounds of "16 rounds". In this case, as one of the "Ki jackpot production" described later, a "Ki jackpot C production" that is a probabilistic promotion and a round promotion may be provided.

In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of jackpot medium production patterns, "super-jump jackpot production", "jutsu jackpot A production", "jutsu jackpot B production", "ki jackpot A production", and "ki jackpot B production" are set. Has been done. The super longevity big hit production is a big hit medium production pattern type that is set corresponding to the big hit symbol combination being a "gold symbol combination". The Kotobuki jackpot A effect and the Kotobuki jackpot B effect are jackpot medium effect pattern types that are set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being the "red symbol combination". The Ki jackpot effect A and the Ki jackpot B effect are jackpot medium effect pattern types set in response to the jackpot symbol combination being the “blue symbol combination”. That is, the jackpot medium effect pattern type is set according to the symbol attributes (gold symbol, red symbol, blue symbol) of the jackpot symbol combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11A, a jackpot symbol combination and a jackpot middle effect pattern selected when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state will be described. First, when the "4R specific jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Ki jackpot B effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. Further, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "super longevity jackpot effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the "4R specific jackpot" of the second special symbol is won, the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 11B, the jackpot symbol combination and the jackpot medium effect pattern selected when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state will be described. When the "4R specific jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, the "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. Further, when the "4R normal jackpot" of the first special symbol is won, the "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, and the "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the gold symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the red symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "gold symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "super longevity jackpot effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Shou jackpot B production" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium production pattern. The second special design "4R"
When the "specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with an 80% probability, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a 20% probability. At this time, when "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination, "jutsu jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. In that case, "Ki jackpot B effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. Further, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol, and "ki jackpot A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern.

The super-juvenile jackpot effect is a jackpot effect pattern that deterministically notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot), which has the highest degree of advantage among the plurality of types of jackpots.

It has been confirmed that the Kotobuki jackpot A production and the Kotobuki jackpot B production have won the "specific jackpot" type that triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state, but until the predetermined number of rounds (4 rounds) is reached. Is a big hit medium production pattern in which the production progresses while it is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds". Here, even if the Kotobuki jackpot A production reaches the predetermined number of rounds (4th round), the promotion production (round promotion production) is not performed, and the specified number of rounds of this jackpot game is "4 rounds". It is confirmed that there is. On the other hand, in the Kotobuki jackpot B production, when the predetermined number of rounds (4th round) is reached, a promotion production (round promotion production) occurs, and the specified number of rounds of this jackpot game is "16 rounds". (The specified number of rounds has been promoted to "16 rounds") is confirmed.

It has been confirmed that the actual number of rounds for the Ki jackpot A production and the Ki jackpot B production is "4 rounds", but until the end of the jackpot demo is reached, the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the probabilistic game state. It is a big hit medium production pattern in which the production progresses without being uncertain whether it is won in the "normal big hit" that triggers the transition to the time-saving game state. Here, in the Ki jackpot A production, even if the jackpot end demo is reached, the promotion production (probability variation promotion production) is not performed, and the jackpot type this time is "normal jackpot" (time reduction after the end of this jackpot game). (Transition to the game state) is confirmed. On the other hand, in the Ki jackpot B production, when the jackpot end demo is reached, a promotion production (probability change promotion production) occurs, and the jackpot type this time is "specific jackpot" (probability change game state after the end of this jackpot game). To move to) is confirmed. Further, in FIG. 11, the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot medium production pattern is different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, but as shown in FIG. 11B, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. It may be a correspondence relationship. Further, a 16R specific jackpot may be provided on the first special symbol, and in that case, a super-jump jackpot effect or a jujutsu jackpot B effect may be executed even at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol. The detailed contents of the promotion production (round promotion production, probabilistic promotion production) will be described later.

Next, the contents of each jackpot production pattern will be described. 12 to 16 are schematic views showing the contents of the big hit medium effect pattern. In the figure, the correspondence relationship between the types of individual effects generated during the big hit game and the timing of occurrence is defined for each effect pattern during the big hit. In addition, in the figure, in order to facilitate understanding of the explanation, an opening mode of the large winning opening 54 is added. However, in the present embodiment, as an opening mode of the large winning opening 54, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. Only the set "long opening" is prepared, but it is not limited to this configuration, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the large winning opening 54 is the specified count number (full count). A "short opening" set to an opening time that is impossible or difficult to enter may be prepared.

First, during the execution of the jackpot start demo, a screen suggesting the type of jackpot production (super-jump jackpot production, longevity jackpot production, ki jackpot production) is displayed, and any jackpot production is started for the player. It is suggested that this is the case. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demo is set to "5 seconds" for all jackpots.

During the execution of each round game, a round effect screen is displayed according to the type of the big hit medium effect (super-jump big hit effect, longevity big hit effect, ki big hit effect). That is, if the big hit medium production pattern is a super long hit big hit production, a super long hit round screen, if the big hit A production A or a long big hit B production, a long life big hit round screen, a good big hit A production or a good big hit B If it is a production, a big hit round screen is displayed. However, if the round promotion effect described later occurs in a predetermined round game, the type of this big hit medium effect will be promoted, and the round effect screen of the lower rank type will be switched to the round effect screen of the higher rank type. It has become.

After the end of each round game, the interval is the pause time (the closing time of the big winning opening 54) from the end of each round game to the start of the setting of the next round game or the jackpot end demo. The period is set. Therefore, the special game is "Big hit start demo"-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> ...-> "Round game"-> "Interval period"-> "Big hit end demo" It is developed in the flow such as. In the present embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" common to all jackpots. The details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the jackpot end demo, the content of the effect mode (game state) to be shifted after the end of the currently executing jackpot game is suggested, and it is suggested to the player which effect mode to enter or continue. Will be done. In addition, during this jackpot end demonstration period, a probabilistic promotion effect or a pending consecutive suggestion effect, which will be described later, may be performed. In addition, the hold consecutive suggestion effect performed during this jackpot end demonstration period includes the hold consecutive suggestion effect (over prize effect or bonus prize effect effect) performed when an over prize or a bonus prize occurs in the modified example described later. Combined production) is not included. That is, the pending continuous suggestion effect according to the modified example described later is not an effect performed during the jackpot end demo period, but an effect performed during the interval period. The details of the probabilistic promotion effect and the hold ream suggestion effect of this embodiment will be described later. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpots. As for the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo, as mentioned above, it is either the big hit game at the time of the first hit (that is, the big hit from the low probability low base state) or the big hit game in the consecutive villa (that is, the high probability). Each demo time may be configured differently depending on whether it is a high base state or a big hit from a low probability high base state). Specifically, in the case of the big hit game in the consecutive villas, the processing of the game before and after the big hit proceeds more quickly than in the case of the big hit game at the time of the first hit (the game in the consecutive villas is made faster). (To proceed), each demo time may be set to a relatively short time. In addition, as described above, when performing a production to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card in the jackpot game at the time of the first hit, it is preferable to perform it within the jackpot end demo period set for a relatively long time. Yes, when performing a production to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card in the jackpot game during the consecutive villas, it is necessary to perform it during the round game execution period instead of the jackpot end demo period set in a relatively short time. Suitable. In addition, regarding the hold continuous suggestion effect, in the big hit game at the time of the first hit (that is, the big hit from the low probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute or lower the execution probability even if there is a big hit hold in the hold. Yes, in the big hit game in the consecutive villas (that is, the big hit from the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state), it is preferable not to execute or increase the execution probability even if there is a big hit hold in the hold. .. Further, the hold continuous suggestion effect is preferably performed during the execution of the special game corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot, and is executed when the jackpot hold in the hold is the jackpot hold corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot. (That is, the jackpot on which the hold consecutive suggestion effect is displayed and the jackpot hold in the hold that triggers the execution of the hold consecutive suggestion effect are targeted only for the 16R specific jackpot, and are targeted for the 4R specific / normal jackpot. It is preferable not to become).

Here, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen (round effect screen) during a round game. Although not shown, various images (animation images, etc.) according to the type of the jackpot effect pattern are displayed in the central region of the screen in order to excite the jackpot game.

In the round display area 730 of the screen, the number of rounds (third round in the illustrated example) indicating how many round games are currently being executed is displayed. For example, if the currently executing round game is the first round game (first round), "ROUND1" is displayed in the round display area, and the currently executing round game is the second round game (second round). In the case of (round), "ROUND2" is displayed in the round display area, and even after that, "ROUND3", "ROUND4", and so on are displayed in the round display area every time a round game is played.

In the right-handed display area 731 of the screen, a right-handed image (also referred to as a firing instruction effect) that urges the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-handed area PA2 (right-handed) is displayed. In addition, even though the situation should be right-handed (during a big hit), on the contrary, when the game ball flows down the left side area PA1 and enters the general winning openings 61 to 63, or the first start. When the ball enters the mouth 51, that is, when the game ball is fired toward the left side region PA1, an effect (attention notification effect) that calls attention so that the player does not hit left is executed. It may be. In the attention notification effect, a message instructing right-handedness is displayed on the screen, or the effect lamp LP lights up in a special light emitting mode (for example, high brightness and high speed or instantaneous blinking) to make the game ball. The player is notified that he / she should fire toward the right area PA2 (right-handed). As a caution notification effect, for example, a voice "Please hit right" (right-handed instruction voice) may be output from the speaker 11. It is desirable that the attention notification effect is in a conspicuous position (for example, a central display area) and a size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device 70) so that the player can clearly see it. , Even in the situation where the right-handed image, the display content in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display content in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733, the highlighting effect, and the display content in the round display area 730 are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be displayed. However, since the right-handed image is also information that should be clearly communicated to the player (information about the appropriate launch position), the right-handed image and the attention notification effect may be displayed in different display areas so as not to be superimposed. Appropriate. On the other hand, from the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display contents in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730 so as not to impair the visibility of the attention notification effect. It is desirable to configure the display so that the display priority is high (that is, while the display can be superimposed, in that case, the caution notification effect is displayed in the foreground). Regarding this launch instruction effect, the case where the ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 during the big hit or the case where the ball enters the first starting opening 51 is displayed as a display condition, but the display time is set to 10 seconds. Has been done. However, if the display condition is satisfied again before the display time of 10 seconds elapses, 10 seconds is set as the display time again (that is, the display time is extended). In addition, it is preferable to display the right-handed image and the attention notification effect not only during the big hit but also in a high-base state such as a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state. If it is continuously displayed over the high base state and the warning effect is displayed in less than 10 seconds until the end of the big hit (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the big hit end demo), it changes from medium to high base It is desirable to configure it so that it is continuously displayed over the entire period.

In the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, when a predetermined prize (over prize or bonus prize described later) occurs, the number of prize balls given based on the prize in order to notify that the prize has occurred. (Number of unit prize balls) is displayed. In the prize ball acquisition display area 732, the number of prize balls to be acquired by the over prize when an over prize occurs (the number of unit prize balls to be acquired when one game ball is won in the large prize opening 54) is displayed. The first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the number of prize balls to be acquired by the bonus prize when a bonus prize is generated (the number of unit prize balls to be acquired when one game ball is won in the general prize opening 64) The second prize ball acquisition display area 732B to be displayed is included. For example, when an over prize occurs, "+15 pt" corresponding to the number of unit prize balls (15 pieces) of the large prize opening 54 is displayed, and when a bonus prize occurs, the unit prize of the general prize opening 64 is displayed. "+3pt" corresponding to the number of balls (3) is displayed. Further, as a modification, the position where the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B may be separated may be set.

In the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired so far based on the fact that the game ball has entered the big prize opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the big hit game in the consecutive villas ( "Cumulative number of prize balls") is displayed. "Renso" is a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state (in the specific game state). This is a state in which big hits are continuously occurring. In addition, the "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to the special game is higher than that of the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the special symbol It is a state in which at least one of the shortening function and the electric chew support function is activated (at least one of a high probability high base state, a low probability high base state, and a high probability low base state). In the present embodiment, at least the gaming state (high base state) in which the electric chew support function is operating corresponds to the "specific gaming state". The cumulative number of prize balls also includes the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game ball into the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the special game when the first hit occurs. The cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls given by the over-winning described later, or may not include the number of prize balls given by the over-winning. Further, the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls given by the bonus prize described later, or may not include the number of prize balls given by the bonus prize. .. The over-winning effect, which will be described later, is executed only because the big winning opening 54 is open (it is possible because the big winning opening 54 is open and the ball can be entered), but the general winning opening 64 is in the big hit. It is possible to enter the ball with or without it. However, the bonus prize-winning effect, which will be described later, is also configured to be executed only during the big hit. Regarding the bonus prize, if it is a big hit, the bonus prize production will be executed, but if it is in a low probability low base state, a special production different from the bonus prize (for example, "Don't enter here now!" A special effect that displays and sounds is executed, but it may be generated when three balls are inserted within a predetermined time (for example, within 5 seconds) instead of one ball), and the probability is high. If it is in the base state or the low probability high base state, neither the bonus winning effect nor the special effect is executed (in that case, nothing needs to be executed, but as another effect, a red flame around the frame of the effect display device 70 May be performed to the extent that is generated for a moment).

In addition to this cumulative number of prize balls, or instead of the cumulative number of prize balls, the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in one big hit game currently being executed. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired so far (referred to as "the number of big hit middle prize balls") may be displayed. Since the number of big hit middle prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player can actually get during the execution of one big hit game, basically, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is set according to the big hit type ( It may be less than the theoretical expected number of prize balls), but it will not exceed the number of prize balls that can be obtained. However, when an over-prize, which will be described later, occurs, the number of big hit middle prize balls may exceed the number of winable prize balls (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the big hit type.

Further, although not shown, during the consecutive villas, the number of consecutive big hits in the specific game state, or the number of consecutive villas including the first hit (the number of times of adding one) is displayed. May be good. As an example, if you hit the jackpot three times in a specific game state after the first hit, you will get "3" during the jackpot.
Display such as "ream villa eyes" or "four consecutive villa eyes" may be displayed. Further, in each round of the special game, the pseudo decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo decorative symbol") may be displayed in a variable manner and a stop display (temporary stop display, fixed stop display). It is preferable that this pseudo-decorative symbol has a symbol mode (a symbol dedicated to the big hit) different from the normal decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative pattern that is variablely displayed during the non-special game is composed of a pattern (character) and numbers, the decorative pattern is only numbers during the special game, and its size is also reduced. Or, if the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed during the non-special game is composed of only numbers, the decorative symbol with only the same numbers is reduced in size during the special game. Furthermore, when doublets such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned at the time of a big hit, "7, 7, 7" is displayed during the special game because it is only necessary to recognize which decorative pattern was used for the big hit. This is not the case, and only "7" (not a combination of three decorative symbols, but only one decorative symbol) may be displayed. Further, during the execution of the jackpot game (round game), the "winning-related effect", which is a characteristic effect of the present embodiment, is executed.

[Prize-related production]
Next, the prize-related production of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effect of the present embodiment. The winning-related effect is an effect executed based on the fact that the game ball enters a specific winning opening (large winning opening 54 or general winning opening 64) during the execution of the jackpot game. This prize-related production includes (A) a large prize-winning production and (B) a general prize-winning production.

<A. Grand prize opening prize production ＞
The large winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball wins the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game. The large winning opening winning production includes a large winning opening normal winning production, a large winning opening over winning production, and a large winning opening count-up production. In the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball wins the large winning opening 54, (b) the game ball enters the large winning opening 54, and (c) the game ball It is used synonymously with being detected by the grand prize opening switch 541 and (d) receiving a grand prize opening winning command from the main control board 100.

≪A-1. Large prize opening Normal prize production ≫
The large winning opening normal winning effect is an effect of notifying that the game ball has won the large winning opening 54 for the winning of the game ball within the specified count number to the large winning opening 54. That is, the large winning opening normal winning effect is performed every time the game ball wins the large winning opening 54 until the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 54 in one round game reaches the specified count number. It will be a production. In the present embodiment, a specific example of the large winning opening normal winning effect is not specified, but at least one of a plurality of effect means such as the effect display device 70, the speaker 11, the effect lamp LP, and the movable accessory 24 is used. There was a big winning opening. As an example, (1) display the object corresponding to the specified count number in one unit game (for example, display the treasure box display for the specified count number in one unit game), and play the game to the large winning opening 54. The effect on the effect display device 70 that the object is deleted each time the ball enters, (2) A speaker that outputs the sound "Chareen" each time the game ball enters the grand prize opening 54. Examples include the production at 11 and (3) the production with the production lamp LP in which the lamp blinks twice each time the game ball enters the large winning opening 54. As a modification of this embodiment, the large winning opening normal winning effect is not provided, and only the large winning opening count-up effect, which will be described later, is used for winning the game ball to the large winning opening 54 up to the specified count number. It may be configured to be done.

≪A-2. Large prize opening over prize production ≫
The large winning opening over winning production (also called "over winning production") targets the winning of the game ball (over winning) that exceeds the specified count number to the large winning opening 54, and the game ball becomes the large winning opening 54. It is a production that suggests or notifies that a prize has been won. "Over winning" means that a game ball exceeding the specified count number (in this embodiment, the 11th and subsequent game balls) is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 during the execution of one round game. Say. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the effective detection period of the large winning opening switch 541 is the detection grace period after each round game is completed (in this embodiment, it is the same period as the interval period, but the interval period and detection period. The grace period may be a different period, for example, a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo, which is closed from the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening 54. If the round game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the interval period, which is the end demo waiting time, is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period is between each round game or the final round. It is a period set between the game and the jackpot end demo, and it is possible to detect the entry of game balls (such as the entry of game balls that exceed the specified count number) after the big winning opening 54 starts closing operation. The detection grace period, which is the period for which the demonstration is performed, may be set to 1 second after the large winning opening 54 starts the closing operation, or may be set to 3 seconds, while at least partially overlapping the interval period. It is set until the elapse of (may be allowed), and over-winning may occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of over-winning, when the 10th count game ball enters the large winning opening 54 and is detected by the large winning opening switch 541, the closing operation of the large winning opening 54 is started. If the subsequent game ball (game ball after the 11th count) has entered the large winning opening 54 before the winning opening 54 is closed, this subsequent game ball (game after the 11th count) An over-winning occurs when the ball) is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period).

The types of over-winning effects include over-winning image display effects and over-winning sound output effects. FIG. 19 is a schematic view showing an example of the over-winning effect of the present embodiment. It is preferable that the production mode of the over-winning effect is different from the production mode of the above-mentioned large winning opening normal winning effect. Further, as a modification, as an effect related to the over-winning, only the over-winning image may be mounted (the over-winning sound is not mounted), or only the over-winning sound may be mounted (the over-winning image is not mounted).

The over-winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as an "over-winning image") suggesting that an over-winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, an over-prize image having the characters "+15 pt" is displayed as an over-prize image in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and "15" are displayed based on the occurrence of the over-prize. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that the over-winning has occurred.

The over-winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a sound (“over-winning sound”) suggesting that an over-winning has occurred from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the sound effect (character voice) of "I did it" is output from the speaker 11, which suggests that the over-winning has occurred.

As a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of production patterns for over-winning effects may be provided. That is, even if a plurality of types of over-winning images or a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are prepared and one of the over-winning images and the over-winning sounds is selected by the production lottery when the over-winning occurs. Good. In that case, depending on the type of the over-winning image or the over-winning sound, the pending consecutive suggestion, the probability change suggestion, the round number suggestion, and the like may be performed. As an example, there is only one type of over-winning image, "+15pt", while there are other over-winning sounds such as "good", "its tone", and "congratulations" in addition to "done". Above all, when the over-winning sound of "Congratulations" occurs, (1) the production also serves as a suggestion for the pending ream, and (2) it also serves as a suggestion that the jackpot currently being executed is a probabilistic jackpot. , (3) It may also serve to suggest that the currently executed jackpot is a 16R jackpot instead of a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of this embodiment, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are set, and in addition to the over-winning occurrence, the pending inner villa is generated according to the type of the over-winning sound. You may adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that the sound is being played (that is, both the over-winning effect and the hold consecutive suggestion effect). Here, the "reserved inner villa" is related to the preceding operation-holding ball when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding operation-holding ball is a big hit. It is planned that a big hit will be made in one or more subsequent operation holding balls existing at a predetermined timing from the permission of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol to the end of the special game executed with the big hit as a trigger. It means that the operation hold ball (also referred to as "big hit hold") is included. In this modification, as a plurality of types of over-winning sounds, an over-winning sound A (speech "Yatte") and an over-winning sound B (sound "Congratulations") are prepared. Then, when there is no jackpot hold when the over-winning occurs (when the holding inner consecutive villa is not established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "0%". ". On the other hand, if there is a big hit hold when the over-winning occurs (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "100%". ". That is, the over-winning sound A is a sound in a normal mode suggesting that over-winning has occurred and that the pending villa has not been established. The over-winning sound B is a special mode of sound suggesting that over-winning has occurred and that the pending villa has been established. The selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B may be set as appropriate. For example, when there is a big hit hold when the over winning occurs (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the over winning sound A The selection rate of the over winning sound B may be "80%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound B may be "20%". Further, in the above modified example, the case where the hold continuous suggestion effect is applied to the over winning sound output effect has been described as an example, but the hold continuous suggestion effect may be applied to the over prize image display effect (for example, over prize). If "+15pt" is displayed in black as an image display effect, it is unlikely that the pending villa has been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold, the pending camp has not been established. The specifications may be such that the villa has been established or is likely to be established). Further, in the above modified example, the over-winning sound B as a pending consecutive suggestion has been described, but the over-winning sound B may be a specification that has a role of probabilistic change suggestion or round number suggestion, and in that case, it is currently executed. Depending on whether the jackpot being hit is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is set. In the case of the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "100%". , The selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "100" in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot). % ”Or, the selection rate of the over winning sound A may be“ 80% ”, and the selection rate of the over winning sound B may be“ 20% ”, depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Therefore, when the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%". In the case of, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "80%" and the selection of the over winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

Further, in this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. As the target operation holding ball, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be targeted. In addition, when the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). , The hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the over winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In addition, on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), when the specific hold that becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the over-winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the big hit hold (the first big hit hold if there are multiple big hit holds) is a low profit big hit, it is held. It may be configured not to execute the villa suggestion effect. That is, if a hold consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is definite that the hold will be held with a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

Further, as a modified example of the present embodiment, it may be suggested that the over-winning effect may have resulted in the over-winning and the possibility of winning the probabilistic jackpot. That is, the over-winning effect and the probability change suggestion effect may be combined. The probabilistic change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probability change jackpot), that is, the state shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end of the special game. Is. In this modification, for example, when a plurality of types of over winning sounds A to C are set and the jackpot type won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "70%", and the over winning sound is over. The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "0%". If the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "over winning sound A" <"over winning sound B" <"over winning sound C", the probability change expectation degree (the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change gaming state) is increased by one step. As a further modification, the over-winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support given after the end of the special game, instead of the probability change expectation.

≪A-3. Grand prize opening count-up production ≫
The large prize opening count-up effect is the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 when the game ball enters the large prize opening 54 during the execution of the special game in the consecutive villa. , It is an effect of adding and displaying the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening. In the present embodiment, since one game ball is inserted into the large prize opening 54 to pay out "15" prize balls (the number of unit prize balls of the large winning opening 54 is 15), the game is played. When a ball enters the large winning opening 54, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in units of "15". Further, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball count counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls, and each time a game ball enters the large winning opening 54 (from the main control board 100). (Every time a prize-winning command is received), the unit prize ball number "15" of the prize-winning opening 54 is added to the count value of the cumulative prize-ball count counter, and the cumulative prize-ball number display area 733 accordingly. A large prize opening count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added to the displayed cumulative number of prize balls. This large winning opening count-up effect is an effect that is executed regardless of whether the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 is within the specified count number or exceeds the specified count number. Is.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a continuous example of a large winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 20, the large prize opening count-up effect is applied to the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 when a game ball is entered into the large prize opening 54. This is an effect in which the number of prize balls given based on the entry of game balls into the large prize opening 54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up format by "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up one by one, such as "7000"->"7001"->...->"7014"->"7015". Note that FIG. 20 shows the flow of the large winning opening count-up effect when an over-winning occurs, and after the over-winning effect is performed in (A) in the figure, (B) to (B) in the figure ( At E), a big prize opening count-up production is being performed. FIG. 20 shows the large winning opening count-up effect when the over-winning effect is performed, but the large winning opening count-up effect is similarly performed not only at the time of over-winning but also for the winning of game balls within the specified count number. Is done. In addition, a large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the entry of a game ball within the specified count number (particularly, a large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the 10th count, which is the specified count number) is being performed. If an over-winning occurs when the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet, the count-up for the large winning opening count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed is completed. After that (after counting for 15 balls), it is desirable that the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over winning is started. Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the large winning opening count-up effect itself corresponding to the over-winning starts in the next round (after the interval period elapses). Although it will overlap with the execution period of the next round), the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning performed during the execution of the next round (the next round starting after the grace period has elapsed) Even if there is a ball in the big prize opening 54 during execution, the ball entry timing is in the middle of performing the big winning opening count-up production corresponding to the over winning, and the count-up for 15 balls is still completed. If not, the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet. After all the count-ups for the big prize opening count-up effect have been completed (after the count-up for 15 balls has been performed), the big prize in the next round It is desirable that the large winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the winning of the winning opening 54 is started.

As a modification of the present embodiment, when an over-prize occurs during the execution of a special game, the over-prize effect is executed, and the number of prize balls given based on the over-prize is converted into the cumulative number of prize balls. It may be configured not to add and display. That is, for the cumulative number of prize balls, the number of prize balls given based on the number of game balls entered within the specified count number to the large prize opening 54 is added and displayed, and the specified count number to the large winning opening 54 is added. The number of prize balls given based on the excess number of game balls may be configured not to be subject to the addition display.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the specified count number is exceeded during the execution of the special game performed by the occurrence of the first hit (the result of the hit / fail determination of the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the normal game state). Even if an over-winning effect occurs, the over-winning effect may not be executed. In addition, as the types of special games, there are high-profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low-profit special games (for example, 4R special games), and the specified number of counts is exceeded during the execution of high-profit special games. An over-winning effect may be executed when a winning is generated, and the over-winning effect may not be executed even if an over-winning exceeding the specified count number occurs during the execution of the low-profit special game. In addition, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. And a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can enter or is easily entered. Even if an over-winning effect that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the execution of the open round game, an over-winning effect is executed, and an over-winning that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the execution of the short open round game. It may be configured not to execute the over-winning effect. In addition, during the execution of the special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won, an over-winning effect is executed when an over-winning that exceeds the specified count number occurs, and a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) During the execution of the special game performed when the player is elected, the over-winning effect may not be executed even if an over-winning exceeding the specified count number occurs.

<B. General prize opening prize production ＞
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect executed when the game ball wins the general winning opening 64. The general winning opening winning production includes a general winning opening normal winning production and a general winning opening count-up production.

≪B-1. General winning opening Normal winning production ≫
The general winning opening normal winning effect (also referred to as "bonus winning effect") is an effect that suggests or notifies that the game ball has won the general winning opening 64. In the following, the fact that the game ball wins the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game is also referred to as "bonus prize", but the game ball wins the general prize except during the execution of the special game (non-special game state). You may win a prize in the mouth 64 or you may call it a "bonus prize".

The types of bonus prize-winning effects include a bonus prize-winning image display production and a bonus prize-winning sound output production. FIG. 21 is a schematic view showing an example of the bonus winning effect of the present embodiment. Further, as a modified example, as an effect related to the bonus winning prize, only the bonus winning image may be installed (the bonus winning sound is not installed), or only the bonus winning sound may be installed (the bonus winning image is not installed). It should be noted that this bonus winning effect is configured to be executed even during the execution of the round game or during the closing of the big winning opening 54 during the big hit (during the interval period), and during the big hit. If the large winning opening 54 is closed (during the interval period), it is configured so that it can be executed at the same time as the over winning effect.

The bonus winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as a "bonus winning image") suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a bonus winning image having the characters "+3pt" is displayed as a bonus winning image in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and "3" are displayed based on the occurrence of the bonus winning. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that the bonus prize has been generated.

The bonus winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a sound (“bonus winning sound”) suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, it is suggested that the bonus prize has been generated by outputting the sound effect "picon" from the speaker 11.

As a modification of this embodiment, a plurality of production patterns for the bonus winning effect may be provided. That is, even if a plurality of types of bonus winning images or a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are prepared and one of the bonus winning images and the bonus winning sounds is selected by a directing lottery when the bonus winning occurs. Good. In that case, depending on the type of the bonus winning image or the bonus winning sound, the pending continuous suggestion, the probability change suggestion, the round number suggestion, and the like may be performed. As an example, while there is only one type of bonus winning image of "+3pt", there are other bonus winning sounds such as "Gachan", "Chine", and "Dokhan" in addition to "Picon". When the bonus winning sound is generated, (1) the production also serves as a suggestion for the pending ream, (2) it also serves as a suggestion that the jackpot currently being executed is a probabilistic jackpot, (3). ) It may also serve as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a 16R jackpot instead of a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the bonus winning sounds, the pending villas are generated according to the types of the bonus winning sounds. You may adopt a configuration that suggests the possibility that the sound is present (that is, the bonus winning effect and the hold consecutive suggestion effect are used together). In this modification, as a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds, a bonus winning sound A (sound effect "picon") and a bonus winning sound B (sound effect "Dokhan") are prepared. Then, if there is no jackpot hold when the bonus winning is generated (when the holding villa is not established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%". ". On the other hand, if there is a big hit hold at the time of the bonus winning (when the holding inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100%". ". That is, the bonus winning sound A is a normal mode sound suggesting that the bonus winning has occurred and that the pending villa has not been established. The bonus winning sound B is a special mode of sound suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that the pending villa has been established. In addition, if there is a big hit hold when the bonus prize is generated (when the hold inner consecutive villa is established), the selection rate of the bonus prize sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus prize sound B is "20%". May be. In the modified example, the case where the hold consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the bonus winning sound output effect is illustrated and described, but the hold consecutive suggestion effect may be applied to the bonus winning image display effect (for example, the bonus winning image). If "+3pt" is displayed in black as a display effect, it is unlikely that the pending villa has been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold, the pending villa has not been established. It may be a specification that holds or is likely to hold). Further, in the above modification, the bonus winning sound B as a pending ream suggestion has been described, but the bonus winning sound B may be a specification that has a role of probabilistic change suggestion or round number suggestion, and in that case, it is currently executed. Depending on whether the jackpot being hit is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A and B is set. In the case of the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%". The selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100" in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot). % ”Or, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A may be“ 80% ”, and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B may be“ 20% ”, depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Correspondingly, when the selection rate of the bonus winning sounds A and B is 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while the 16R jackpot. In the case of, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%", the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

Further, in this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. As the target operation holding ball, only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may be targeted. In addition, when the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). , The hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed in the wake of the bonus winning prize generated during the execution of the special game. In addition, on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), when the specific hold that becomes a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed with the bonus winning prize generated during the execution of the special game as an opportunity. In other words, even if there is a big hit hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the big hit hold (the first big hit hold if there are multiple big hit holds) is a low profit big hit, it is held. It may be configured not to execute the villa suggestion effect. That is, if a hold consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is definite that the hold will be held with a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

In addition, as a modified example of the present embodiment, it may be suggested that the bonus winning effect may have been won in addition to the bonus winning effect. That is, the bonus winning effect and the probability change suggestion effect may be combined. The probabilistic change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probability change jackpot), that is, the state shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end of the special game. Is. In this modification, for example, when a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set and the jackpot type won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "70%", and the bonus winning sound is The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is "0%". If the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "bonus winning sound A" <"bonus winning sound B" <"bonus winning sound C", the probability change expectation degree (the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change gaming state) increases by one step. As a further modification, the bonus winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support given after the end of the special game, instead of the probability change expectation.

≪General winning opening count-up production≫
The general prize opening count-up effect is applied to the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 when the game ball enters the general prize opening 64 during the execution of the special game in the consecutive villa. This is an effect of adding and displaying the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general prize opening 64. In the present embodiment, since one game ball is inserted into the general prize opening 64 to pay out "three" prize balls (the number of unit prize balls of the general winning opening 64 is three), the game is played. When a ball enters the general winning opening 64, the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in units of "3". Further, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls described above, and each time a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (mainly). (Every time a general winning opening winning command is received from the control board 100), "3" corresponding to the unit winning number of the general winning opening 64 is added to the count value of the cumulative winning ball counter, and the cumulative winning ball is correspondingly added. A general winning opening count-up effect is performed in which "3" is added and displayed to the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the number display area 733.

Here, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing a continuous example of a general winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 22, the general winning opening count-up effect is the current value of the cumulative winning ball number displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 when a game ball is entered into the general winning opening 54. In addition, the value of the number of unit prize balls given based on the entry of the game ball into the general prize opening 64 is added and displayed by "1" in order in the count-up format. In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is counted up and displayed one by one, such as "8000"-> "8001"-> "8002"-> "8003".

The general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production, general winning opening count-up production) is the general winning opening 64 provided in the right area PA2 of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game. It is performed for the entry of a game ball into. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 provided in the left area PA1 among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game, the general winning opening winning effect is performed. I can't. However, if the game ball enters any of the general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game, regardless of the type of the general winning openings 61 to 64 (regardless of whether or not the general winning opening winning effect is executed). The prize balls (3 pieces) based on the prizes of the game balls to the general prize openings 61 to 64 will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given by the bonus prize is added to the cumulative number of prize balls each time one bonus prize is generated. The number of prize balls based on all the bonus prizes generated during the execution of one round game (number of unit prize balls x number of bonus prizes during one round game) is not limited to that of the round game. It may be configured to be collectively displayed in addition to the cumulative number of prize balls at the end, or the number of prize balls based on all the bonus prizes generated during the execution of one special game (number of unit prize balls x 1 time). The number of bonus prizes during the special game) may be collectively displayed in addition to the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the final round game or at the end of the special game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the board surface configuration in which the general winning opening 64 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting opening 51 is adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the general winning opening 64 is the second. A board surface configuration may be adopted that is arranged on the downstream side of the starting port 51. In that case, the general winning opening 64 may be arranged on the upstream side of the large winning opening 54, or the general winning opening 64 may be arranged on the downstream side of the large winning opening 54.

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 64 may also be used as the operating opening (operating gate 53) that triggers the execution of the ordinary symbol lottery. That is, when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting opening 52 is performed, and a predetermined number (for example, one or two) is performed. The prize ball may be configured to be paid out.

In addition, as described above, in the general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production, general winning opening count-up production), a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 when the currently executing game state is a special game state. Since the production is performed with this as an opportunity, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 when the currently executing game state is a non-special gaming state, the general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production, general) Winning opening count-up production) will not be performed. That is, even if the currently executing game state is a game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (non-electric support state), the currently executing game state displays the variable display of the second special symbol. Even in the game state (electric support state), which is the main body of the game, the general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production, general winning opening count-up production) is performed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. I can't. If the currently executing game state is a game state (electric support state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game, the screen is premised on the fact that the consecutive villa state is still continuing. In the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the above, the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game in the consecutive villa (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game) is displayed. However, in this electric support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the special game in the consecutive villas is displayed, and even if the game ball enters the general prize opening 64, the number of prize balls is the cumulative prize. It is not added to the number of balls (general winning opening count-up effect is not performed), and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not change (the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game is maintained).

In addition, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game performed by the first hit (the result of the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol becomes a big hit in the normal game state). , The bonus prize-winning effect may not be executed. Further, as the types of special games, there are high-profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low-profit special games (for example, 4R special games), and a game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 64 during execution of the high-profit special games. The bonus winning effect may be executed by entering the ball, and the bonus winning effect may not be executed even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the low-profit special game. In addition, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. And a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count number (full count) can be entered or is easily entered. Even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the open round game, a bonus winning effect is executed, and even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the short open round game. It may be configured so that the bonus winning effect is not executed. In addition, during the execution of the special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is won, a bonus winning effect is executed by the game ball entering the general winning opening 64, and the normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) is executed. During the execution of the special game performed when the player wins the game, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning effect may not be executed.

<Other features of prize-related production>
Next, other features of the large winning opening winning effect and the general winning opening winning effect of the present embodiment will be described. Since the large prize opening count-up effect and the general prize opening count-up effect are effects for the same display object (cumulative prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733), the large prize opening count is described below. The up production and the general prize opening count-up production may be collectively referred to as "count-up production".

≪Count-up production time≫
In the present embodiment, the time for counting up for one prize ball (the time required for counting up from "N" to "N + 1") is set to "0.03 seconds". That is, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the large prize opening count-up effect is the number of prize balls (unit) given by one game ball entering the large winning opening 54 in the time value required for counting up for one prize ball. Derived by multiplying the value of (number of prize balls), the execution time of the large prize opening count-up effect is "15 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". It becomes. Similarly, in the general prize opening count-up effect, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) given by entering one game ball into the general winning opening 64 in the time value required for counting up for one prize ball. It is derived by multiplying the value of (number), and the execution time of the general winning opening count-up effect is "3 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds". .. In the following, for convenience, the execution time of the large winning opening count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one large winning opening count-up effect) is set to "count-up production time A", and the general winning opening count-up is performed. The execution time of the effect (the time value from the start to the end of one general winning opening count-up effect) is abbreviated as "count-up effect time B". Here, the big prize opening normal prize production, the over prize production, and the bonus prize production are configured not to be executed during the execution of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo even during the execution of the special game. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect are not executed even during the execution of the special game, during the execution of the big hit start demo and the execution of the big hit end demo. ing.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 1)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as “interval period”) set after the end of each round game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo, and is the period during which the closing operation of the winning opening 54 is maintained. The game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the end demo waiting time. In the present embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds", which is common to all round games. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is set to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball becomes the big winning opening 54 just before the end of a certain round game. Even if the large winning opening count-up effect is performed based on entering the ball, the large winning opening count-up effect will be completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the big prize opening count-up effect will be performed over the interval period until the next round game or the big hit end demo (if the over prize is won, the interval period may be exceeded. (There is a possibility), the division between each round game or the division between the final round game and the jackpot end demo can be clarified.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 2)
The count-up production time A is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. As described above, the count-up effect time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (during jackpot production). ing. The execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the last round game in the special game elapses to the end of the special game. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final round game, the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 is effectively detected (that is, it is detected as the target of the winning ball payout, and it is determined that the ball is illegally entered. Although it is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the round game that may be detected), the execution time of the big hit end demo is such that the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 within that time. It is set as a preparation time for a game (effect mode) after the end of a special game separated from the round game, which is unlikely to be effectively detected. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the game ball is just before the end of the final round game. Even if the big winning opening count-up effect is performed based on entering the big winning opening 54, and further, even if an over-winning occurs in the final round game, the final round Even after the jackpot 54 is closed after the game (even during the jackpot end demo period), if the specifications are such that the jackpot count-up effect is performed, the jackpot count will be counted within the jackpot end demo period. The up production will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The delimiter can be clarified. As a modification, for at least a part of the execution time of the jackpot end demo, the entry of the game ball into the jackpot 54 may be effectively detected within that time.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 3)
In the present embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 in one round game, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts in this one round game (1). The number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round game (the production of counting up the large prize openings) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, as described above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (production during jackpot). In the present embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the final round Even if a plurality of large winning opening count-up effects are continuously performed based on a plurality of gaming balls entering the large winning opening 54 in succession just before the end of the round game, the final round Even after the big winning opening 54 is closed after the round game (even during the big hit end demo period), if the specifications are such that the big winning opening count-up effect is performed, the big winning opening will be within the big hit end demo period. The count-up production will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. The delimiter can be clarified.

In addition, even when the game ball exceeds the specified count number and enters the large winning opening 54 in one round game (when an over-winning occurs), the cumulative number of counts in this one round game ( It is preferable that the total time of the count-up production time A (the specified count number + the number of over prizes) is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. That is, the time obtained by adding the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified number of counts in one round game and the total time of the count-up effect time A for the number of over-winnings is the time after the end of the round game. By setting it shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, even after the jackpot end 54 is closed after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the jackpot end count-up effect is produced. In the case of the specification to perform, even if an over-winning occurs, the big winning opening count-up effect is ended within the execution time of the big hit end demo, and the special game ends and the variable display starts. It is preferable to clarify. The number of over prizes is indefinite because it depends on the progress of the game (the launch status of the game balls and the flow status of the game balls), but even if it is assumed that the number is 10 balls, which is the same as the specified count number. It is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up production time A for the number of over prizes are added together. The time is 4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds, which is 9 seconds, which is shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo, which is 20 seconds), and is configured as such.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 4)
As a modification of this embodiment, when a game ball having a specified count number enters the large winning opening 54 in one round game, the total count-up production time A for the specified count number in this one round game is totaled. The time may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modification, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) of the above embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common to all round games. In this modification, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that a certain round game ends. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the big prize 54 in succession just before the end of the round game, even if a plurality of big prize opening count-up effects are continuously performed, within the interval time after the end of the round game. The big prize opening count-up production will be completed. Therefore, the big prize opening count-up effect is not performed over the interval period until the next round game or the big hit end demo, and the break between each round game or the final round game and the big hit end demo. The delimiter between can be clarified.

In addition, even when the number of game balls exceeds the specified count number and only one ball is entered into the large winning opening 54 in one round game (when only one over-winning occurs), this one round game is also performed. It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A for the cumulative number of counts (specified count number + 1 over-winning number) is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. That is, the total time of the count-up production time A for the specified number of counts in one round game and the count-up production time A for one over prize (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4). .95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, so that even if an over-winning occurs, the big winning opening count-up effect is ended within the interval period. , It is preferable to clarify the division between round games.

(Relationship of count-up production time A 5)
As a modification of this embodiment, when a game ball having a specified count number (full count) enters the large winning opening 54 in all round games of one special game, the number of full counts generated during the execution of this special game. The total time of the count-up production time A of minutes (specified number of rounds × specified number of counts) may be configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. In this modified example, when the specified number of rounds of one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), the game balls enter the large winning opening by the specified count number (10 balls) in all round games. In this case, a total of 160 large winning opening count-up effects are executed. Therefore, the total time of the count-up production time A for all the counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up production time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) x 16 rounds (specified number of rounds) = 72 seconds". is there. On the other hand, in this modified example, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "120 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (production during jackpot). In this modification, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up production time A for all the counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demo. , Even after the big prize opening 54 is closed after the final round game (even during the big hit end demo period), if the specification is to perform the big winning opening count-up effect, go to the big winning opening 54. Even if the execution of the big prize opening count-up effect is congested during the round game or during the interval period due to the continuous winning of the game balls, all the big prize opening count-up effects must be completed at least by the end of the big hit end demo. Is guaranteed, so it is possible to smoothly proceed with the production during the big hit.

≪Priority of the big winning opening count-up production after the end≫
FIG. 23 is a time chart used to explain the priority of the large winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 23, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) continuously enter the large winning opening 54 during the execution of a certain round game, 2 based on the continuous winning. The big prize opening count-up production of the times will be executed. Specifically, when the execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied by the first game ball entering the large winning opening 54, the previous large winning opening count-up effect is executed. Similarly, when the execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied by the second game ball winning the large winning opening 54, the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect is executed. The execution condition of the large winning opening count-up effect is a condition for starting the execution of the large winning opening count-up effect, and the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game (large winning opening). It is established when the entry of the game ball is detected by the mouth switch 541). At this time, if the execution condition of the later grand prize opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous grand prize opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous grand prize opening count-up effect is in progress. After the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is started without stopping at. That is, in the present embodiment, the priority of the first big winning opening count-up production is set higher than the priority of the later big winning opening count-up production among the two previous big winning opening count-up productions. Before the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is not started, and the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed. After that, the execution of the later grand prize opening count-up effect is started. If the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the earlier large winning opening count-up effect and the later large winning opening count-up effect are started. It is preferable to continuously (seamlessly) connect the production and to continuously count up the large winning openings for two times. However, as a modification, after a predetermined time (minute time) has elapsed after the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later large winning opening count-up effect is started, and the above A clear division may be provided between the large winning opening count-up effect and the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect. Here, the large winning opening count-up effect has been explained, but the general winning opening count-up effect may have the same specifications, and the execution conditions for the later general winning opening count-up effect during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect. If is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is not interrupted in the middle, and after the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is completed, the later general winning opening count-up is completed. It is preferable to configure it to start the execution of the effect. In addition, if the execution condition of the later general winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is in the middle. It is preferable that the execution of the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is completed without discontinuing. In addition, if the execution condition of the later large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is in the middle. It is preferable to configure the system so that the execution of the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is completed without interruption.

As a modification of this embodiment, if the execution conditions for the later large winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the earlier large winning opening count-up effect is performed. It may be interrupted and configured to start the execution of the next grand prize opening count-up effect. In other words, the priority of the later big prize opening count-up production is higher than the priority of the previous big winning opening count-up production. In that case, when the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is interrupted, the count value is forcibly forced to the final value of the previous large winning opening count-up effect or the initial value of the later large winning opening count-up effect. It is preferable to switch to and start the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect from that point. In this variant, the large winning opening count-up effect was explained, but the general winning opening count-up effect may have the same specifications, and during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the later general winning opening count-up effect When the execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect may be interrupted and the execution of the next general winning opening count-up effect may be started. In addition, if the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect is interrupted and the next general winning opening count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to start the execution of the mouth count-up effect. In addition, if the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is interrupted and the next large winning opening count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to start the execution of the mouth count-up effect.

(Emphasis on the cumulative number of prize balls)
FIG. 24 is a schematic view for explaining the emphasis effect of the present embodiment. (A) in the figure shows the case where the over-winning effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect, and (B) in the figure shows the case where the bonus prize-winning effect is executed during the execution of the emphasis effect. In the present embodiment, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive villa is set to a predetermined specific value when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game. When it reaches, the emphasis effect is configured to notify that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a specific value. The specific value is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10000). That is, every time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value (10000 pieces, 20000 pieces, 30,000 pieces, etc.) of the predetermined number of prize balls, the emphasis effect is performed. Therefore, the highlighting effect may be referred to as a specific value reaching effect, and the highlighting effect may be referred to as a specific value corresponding display. In this embodiment, even if the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value triggered by an over-winning or bonus winning, the emphasis effect is executed. In that case, the emphasis effect and the over-winning are performed. The production or the bonus prize-winning production is executed in duplicate.

As shown in FIG. 24, the types of highlighting effects include a highlighting effect that magnifies and displays a specific value (“20,000 pt” in the illustrated example) that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached in the highlighting area 735 in the center of the screen, and a speaker. There is an emphasis sound output effect that outputs a special sound (sound of "excellent condition" in the illustrated example) from No. 11.

The highlighting of the specific value is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), during which the cumulative prize ball number display is updated (addition display) by the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64. ), The highlighting is not updated (additional display). At this time, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of "cumulative prize ball number display" <"highlight display" <"round display". The “layer” means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image constituting the entire image. The higher the display priority, the higher the layer (front side when viewed from the player), and the lower the display priority, the lower layer (rear side when viewed from the player). Will be done. In FIG. 24, the highlighting and the cumulative prize ball number display are shown in a form in which they are not superimposed, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed in order to further emphasize the highlighting. In that case, the above priority is given. Therefore, the highlighting may be displayed in front of the cumulative prize ball number display (the highlighting may be displayed so as to cover a part or all of the cumulative prize ball number display).

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the prize ball acquisition display area 732 and the highlight display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas, and when an over prize or a bonus prize occurs during the execution of the highlight display, , The emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed in parallel at the same time. When the emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed at the same time, even if the display priority of the emphasized image is higher than the over-winning image or the bonus winning image, the over-winning image is higher than the emphasized image. Alternatively, the priority of displaying the bonus winning image may be increased. In FIG. 24, the highlighting and the over-winning image / bonus winning image are shown in a form in which they are not superimposed, but the display area may be enlarged and superimposed in order to further emphasize the highlighting. In that case, the above Depending on the priority, the highlighting may be displayed in front of the over winning image / bonus winning image (the highlighting may be displayed covering a part or all of the over winning image / bonus winning image).

In addition, when an over-winning occurs during the output of the special sound, the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound is output in duplicate during the output of the special sound. If the special sound and the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound overlap, the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be set to a lower volume than the volume of the special sound having a high priority, and vice versa. Therefore, the sound of the special sound may be set to a lower volume than the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound having a high priority. In that case, the volume with the lower priority (the volume with the lower priority) may be substantially set to "0".

≪Over prize production when an error occurs / Bonus prize production≫
In the present embodiment, when various errors occur in the game machine, it is configured to control whether or not the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed according to the error type. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram for explaining the error type of the game machine. In this embodiment, the error types that occur in the game machine are "door / frame opening error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", "excessive winning error", and "payout error". ] Etc. are set. The above error type is an example, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the game machine and the like.

The door / frame opening error is a door opening switch that detects the opening of the glass frame 5 and the opening of the front frame 2 when the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 or the back set board 30 is open with respect to the outer frame 1. This is an error that occurs when the frame opening switch or the back set opening switch that detects the opening of the back set board 30 is broken or malfunctions. This door / frame opening error is cleared when the game machine is confirmed to have no abnormality and the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 and the back set board 30 are closed.

The magnetic sensor error and the radio wave sensor error are errors that occur when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when the radio wave sensor detects radio waves, and when the magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor is disconnected, short-circuited, or malfunctions. The magnetic sensor error and the radio wave sensor error are cleared when the game machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is an error that occurs when the radio wave sensor and various switches provided on the game board surface are disconnected, short-circuited, or malfunction. The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is cleared when the game machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The excess winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball is excessively entered into various winning openings. The excess winning error is canceled when the game machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again. Here, the over-winning error includes an over-winning error of the large winning opening 54 (also referred to as "large winning opening over-winning error") and an over-winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 64 ("general winning opening over-winning error"). ”) Etc. are included. For example, the large winning opening excess winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 during the execution of one round game. The general winning opening excess winning error occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the general winning opening 61 to 63 per unit time (for example, 30 seconds), or per unit time (for example, 30 seconds). This is an error that occurs when a specific number (for example, 60 balls) of a game ball enters the general winning opening 64. Since the general winning opening 64 is arranged so that the game ball can easily enter the general winning opening 64 rather than the general winning opening 61 to 63, the general winning opening 64 has an error judgment value (error) based on the number of balls entered per unit time. The value of the number of game balls to be determined) is a value with a margin. In the present embodiment, when an over-winning error of the large winning opening occurs, or when a ball enters the large winning opening 54 when the large winning opening 54 is not open (during a non-special game), that is, When an abnormal winning of the large winning opening 54 is detected (when it is determined that the winning is abnormal), the external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. On the other hand, when an excessive winning error occurs in the general winning opening, that is, when an abnormal winning in the general winning openings 61 to 64 is detected (when it is determined to be an abnormal winning), an error occurs from the external information terminal board 600. Does not output an external information signal (security signal) indicating that it has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal plate 600 will be described later.

The payout error is an error that occurs when the payout of the prize ball is hindered. This payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball plate 9 is full with a game ball (the full tank switch is on), a ball biting / jam jam error in the prize ball payout unit 34, and a game ball is replenished from the game island. Includes ballless errors that cannot be completed and are insufficient. When a full tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two stages. The notification level 1 is a level in a state in which the on state continues for 30 seconds after the full tank switch is turned on. At the notification level 1, only the voice notification "Please pull out the ball" is executed. At this notification level 1, even if a ball is entered into the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is not restricted (the prize ball payout is not stopped). When the on state exceeds 30 seconds, the notification level shifts to 2, and not only the voice notification "Please pull out the ball" but also the "image prompting the ball removal of the lower ball plate" is displayed on the effect display device 70. Furthermore, even if there is a ball in the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is restricted (the prize ball payout is stopped). As a modification, the specification may be such that only image notification is performed at notification level 1 and both image notification and voice notification are performed at notification level 2. Regarding the ball biting / jamming error of the prize ball payout unit 34 and the ballless error in which the game ball cannot be replenished from the game island, even if there is a ball in the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, Prize ball payout is restricted (prize ball payout is stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, various errors are classified into "first error", "second error", and "third error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. The first error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a medium level. The first error includes a "door / frame opening error". The second error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a high level. The second error includes "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", and "excessive winning error". The third error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a low level. The third error includes a "payout error".

Here, when the above error occurs in the game machine, image effect, sound effect, etc. are performed as various error notifications, and specifically, the content of the error is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Then, an error notification sound is output from the speaker 11 at an error volume. As a modification of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be configured to blink at the brightness for the error.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine becomes the first error (door / frame opening error), even if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs, a part of the over prize effect or a part of the bonus prize effect is performed. It is configured so that it will not be damaged. That is, when the first error occurs in the game machine, the over winning image display effect and the bonus winning image display effect are allowed to be executed among the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect, but the over winning sound output effect and the bonus winning sound output effect and Execution of bonus winning sound output production is restricted. Even if an over prize or an extra prize occurs during the first error, do not overlook that the game machine is in the first error state because a part of the over prize production and the bonus prize production is not performed. It has become. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is permitted. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating the first error is displayed in order to notify that the first error has occurred, but it is not displayed on the full screen. , Display using only a part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over winning image and the bonus winning image, but all of them can be displayed at the same time, and the count-up effect can be displayed at the same time. However, while the error notification sound for notifying that it is the first error is being output, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output (or the volume is low). In addition, when the game machine is in the first error state and an over prize or a bonus prize occurs, the prize ball is paid out based on the over prize or the bonus prize.

In addition, when the game machine has a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection short-circuit power supply error, excessive winning error), even if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated, an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect is produced. It is configured so that not all of the above is done. That is, when a second error occurs in the gaming machine, the execution of both the over-winning image display effect and the over-winning sound output effect is restricted as the over-winning effect, and the bonus-winning image display effect and the bonus-winning sound output effect are restricted. Execution of both bonus sound output effects is restricted. Even if an over-prize or the like occurs during the second error, it is not overlooked that the game machine is in the second error state because all the over-prize effects and the like are not performed. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is also restricted. Specifically, when a second error occurs, an error image indicating that the second error has occurred is displayed on the full screen in order to notify that the second error has occurred, so that an over-winning image or a bonus is displayed. The winning image and the count-up effect are not displayed. Further, while the error notification sound for notifying that the second error is being output is being output, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output. In addition, when the game machine is in the second error state and an over prize or a bonus prize occurs, the prize ball is paid out based on the over prize or the bonus prize.

In addition, even if the game machine becomes a third error (payout error) and it becomes impossible to pay out the prize balls, if an over-prize or bonus prize occurs, an over-prize effect or bonus It is configured so that the winning effect is executed. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the game machine, there is no risk that there will be any particular problem even if the game is continued, and there is no risk that the player will suffer any disadvantages. Therefore, an over-winning effect or a bonus prize will be awarded by error notification. This is because limiting the production may rather reduce the interest of the game. In this case, the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is also executed. However, if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs when the game machine is in the third error state, the prize ball will not be paid out based on the over prize or the bonus prize.

In the present embodiment, when an over-winning or bonus winning is generated when the game machine is "specific error" in this way, a part or all of the over-winning effect is performed according to the error type in which the over-winning is performed. In addition to being restricted, it is configured so that part or all of the bonus winning effect is restricted. That is, when the first error occurs among the specific errors, the execution of one or a part of the over-winning effects (over-winning sound output effects) is restricted, and the second error occurs. When it occurs, the execution of a plurality or all element effects (over-winning sound output effect, over-winning image display effect, etc.) of the over-winning effect is restricted. This is because, in the present embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. A specific error may be used as an error type in which the progress of the game is prohibited. In addition, a specific error may be used as an error type that occurs when an abnormality suspected of being fraudulent (goto) is detected. Further, a specific error may be set as an error type that can be resolved by shutting down / turning on the power again.

As a modification of this embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect higher than the over-winning effect, for example, the error notification sound is preferentially output over the over-winning sound (for example, the over-winning sound). The error notification sound may have a higher audio level than the over-winning sound), and the error notification image may be displayed with priority over the over-winning image (for example, the error notification image has priority over the over-winning image). The degree may be set high).

≪Over prize production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the over-winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. For each round game, a detection valid period (large winning opening valid period) in which the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 541 is valid is set. This detection validity period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball entered immediately before the large winning opening 54 is closed to reach the large winning opening switch 541. In the present embodiment, the round period from the start to the end of each round game (from the opening of the large winning opening 54 to the closing) and the end of the round game (the large winning opening 54 is closed). The detection valid period of the grand prize opening switch 541 is set over the entire period from the interval period until the predetermined time elapses. By setting this detection valid period from the round period to the interval period, even if the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the round period ends, the large winning opening 54 The prize for the game ball is treated as valid (the prize ball is subject to payout). That is, the "round game execution period (large winning opening opening period)" and the above-mentioned "detection grace period (interval period)" are set as continuous detection valid periods. Further, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

In the present embodiment, the period of the interval period is set as an over-winning effect permissible period in which the execution of the over-winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives. On the other hand, outside the interval period, even if the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives, the over-winning effect is prohibited from being executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, the number of game balls exceeding the specified count number by the large winning opening switch 541 (11 in the illustrated example). When the game ball of the eye) is detected and the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives within this interval period, the execution of the over-winning effect within this interval period is permitted. However, if the production time of the over-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, all the over-winning effects are executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over-winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if an over-winning image and an over-winning sound are provided as an over-winning effect, the over-winning image may be interrupted (hidden or erased from the middle), and the over-winning sound may be output without interruption. Good. In addition, as with the over-winning effect, the large winning opening count-up effect may be executed with the over-winning within the interval period as an opportunity. In that case, the interval period ends from the execution start timing of the large winning opening count-up effect. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the big prize opening count-up effects by the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly suspend it.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26B, a game ball that exceeds the specified count number by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the final round game (the eleventh game in the illustrated example). Even if a ball) is detected, if the execution timing of the over-winning effect arrives within the jackpot end demo period after the lapse of this interval period, the over-winning effect is executed within this jackpot end demo period. Is prohibited. However, during the big hit end demonstration period, the execution of the over-prize effect is only prohibited, and the prize balls will be paid out based on this over-prize. Further, in the above case, the execution of the large winning opening count-up production may be prohibited as well as the over winning production.

As a modification of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period is set as the over-winning effect permissible period during which the execution of the over-winning effect is permitted, and the over-winning effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot end demo. You may. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demo period as the over-winning effect allowable period. As an example, out of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demo period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the over-winning effect allowable period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the over-winning effect prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, the over-winning effect permissible period and the over-winning effect prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the final round. As an example, the first 1.5 of the interval period of 2 seconds. Seconds may be set as the over-winning effect permissible period, and 0.5 seconds thereafter may be set as the over-winning effect prohibition period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the over-winning effect prohibition period. Further, as a further modification, considering that the timing when the game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 and the execution timing of the over winning effect are synchronized, the final round. If a game ball that exceeds the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, the over winning effect is always executed (at the end timing of the interval period). (Excluding the entry of the ball), as described above, if the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the production time of the over-winning effect, the interval period Based on the end, the over-winning effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period (however, if the over-winning effect includes an over-winning image and an over-winning sound, the over-winning image is interrupted. (Hide or erase from the middle), the over winning sound may be output without interruption), and when the game ball is detected in the big winning opening 54 during the big hit end demo period ( (When a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541), the over winning effect may not be executed. In that case, the final round of the large winning opening count-up effect is also performed. If a game ball that exceeds the specified count number is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, it is always executed (excluding the ball entered at the end timing of the interval period). At the time of execution, as described above, if the time from the execution start timing of the grand prize opening count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the production time of the grand prize opening count-up effect, the interval period ends. Based on this, the big prize opening count-up effect is configured to be forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period, and when a game ball is detected in the big winning opening 54 during the big hit end demonstration period (large winning opening). When the switch 541 detects a game ball exceeding the specified count number), it may be configured not to be executed.

≪Bonus winning production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus winning effect is executed at the end of the big hit. In the present embodiment, the bonus prize-winning effect is allowed to be executed when the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives within the round period and the interval period. On the other hand, during the jackpot end demo period, even if the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives, the bonus prize-winning effect is prohibited from being executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, within this interval period. When the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives, the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect within this interval period is allowed. However, if the production time of the bonus prize production (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the bonus prize production to the end timing of the interval period, all the bonus prize production is executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus winning effect at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, if the bonus winning image and the bonus winning sound are provided as the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption. Good. In addition, as with the bonus winning effect, the large winning opening count-up effect may be executed with the bonus winning within the interval period as an opportunity. In that case, the interval period ends from the execution start timing of the large winning opening count-up effect. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the large winning opening count-up effects by the end of the interval period. Therefore, based on the end of the interval period, the large winning opening count-up effect is set to the end timing of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly suspend it.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), even if a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, the interval period When the execution timing of the bonus prize-winning effect arrives within the jackpot end demo period after the lapse of time, the execution of the bonus prize-winning effect within this jackpot end demo period is prohibited. However, during the big hit end demonstration period, the execution of the bonus prize production is only prohibited, and the prize balls will be paid out based on this bonus prize. Further, in the above case, the execution of the large winning opening count-up production may be prohibited as well as the bonus winning production.

As a modification of this embodiment, the jackpot end demo period is set as the bonus prize-winning effect permissible period during which the bonus prize-winning effect is allowed to be executed, and the bonus prize-winning effect is executed during the jackpot end demo. You may. In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demo period as the bonus prize production allowable period. As an example, out of the 20 seconds of the big hit end demo period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the bonus winning production allowable period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the bonus winning production prohibition period. Further, as a further modification example, the bonus winning effect allowable period and the bonus winning effect prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the final round. As an example, the first 1.5 of the interval period of 2 seconds. Seconds may be set as the bonus winning production allowable period, and 0.5 seconds after that may be set as the bonus winning production prohibition period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the bonus winning production prohibiting period. Further, as a further modification, considering that the timing when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 and the execution timing of the bonus winning effect are synchronized, after the final round game is completed. If a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period of, the bonus winning effect is always executed (excluding the ball entering at the end timing of the interval period). As described above, if the time from the execution start timing of the bonus winning effect to the end timing of the interval period is longer than the production time of the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning effect is performed during the interval period based on the end of the interval period. While it is configured to be forcibly interrupted at the end timing of (However, if a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound are provided as a bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image is interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus is added. The winning sound may be output without interruption), and if a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the jackpot end demo period (game with the right general winning opening switch 641) If a ball is detected), the bonus winning effect may not be executed. In that case, the general winning opening count-up effect is also the right general winning within the interval period after the end of the final round game. When a game ball is detected by the mouth switch 641, it is always executed (excluding the ball entering at the final timing of the interval period), and when executing it, as described above, from the production time of the general winning opening count-up effect. However, if it is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the general winning opening count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period, the general winning opening count-up effect is forced at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. It is configured to be interrupted, and if a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the big hit end demonstration period (when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641), it is configured not to be executed. You may.

On the other hand, during the big hit start demo period, theoretically, the game ball does not enter the big prize opening 54 (because no over-winning occurs), so during the big hit start demo period, the big prize No oral prize-winning effect (over-winning effect) is performed. It is possible to enter the general prize opening 64 even during the jackpot start demonstration period, but even if the ball enters the general winning opening 64, the general winning opening winning production during the jackpot start demonstration period ( No bonus prize production) will be performed, and if the ball is entered during the big hit start demo period, it will be entered at any time (especially even if it is entered at the end of the big hit start demo period). The general prize opening prize production (bonus prize production) corresponding to the ball is not performed in the first round game after the big hit start demo, and the prize ball (number of prize balls) corresponding to the ball is It is not a cumulative target in the cumulative prize ball number display.

(Launch handle detection)
The game by the game machine PM is executed on the premise that the player rotates the firing handle 12 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA. The launch handle 12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) that detects that the player is touching the launch handle 12. This touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance when the player touches the firing handle 12. When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the firing handle 12, it outputs a detection signal that permits the payout control board 300 to energize the firing solenoid. Further, the main control board 100 monitors the touch state of the firing handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits the effect control command (handle state effect command) to the effect control board 200. As a result, the effect control board 200 specifies whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 12 (whether or not the firing handle 12 is operated).

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over-winning effect and the general winning effect. Even if the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the launch handle 12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), the effect control means 220 wins a prize for the game ball launched before that. When a game ball exceeding the specified count number (the eleventh game ball in the illustrated example) is detected by entering the mouth 54 (when an over-winning occurs), an over-winning effect is executed. It has become like. Similarly, in the production control means 220, even if it is not detected that the player is touching the launch handle 12 (when the launch of the game ball is stopped), the game ball launched before that is a general prize. When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 by entering the mouth 64 (when a bonus winning occurs), the bonus winning effect is executed. That is, the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed regardless of the detection result of the touch sensor at the timing of the over-winning and the timing of the bonus winning. Therefore, even if the launch of the game ball by the player is stopped due to the closing of the large winning opening 54 (the round game ends), over-winning or bonus winning occurs within the interval period. In some cases, an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect will occur, and there will be dissatisfaction that no winning effect will be performed even though the game ball actually entered the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

(Game start preparation production)
In the present embodiment, when the currently executing game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), the standby demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) is triggered by the interruption state of the game continuing for a predetermined time or longer. Is executed. "The suspended state of the game continues for a predetermined time or longer" means that, for example, the period in which the operation holding ball of the special symbol does not exist continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the period in which the variation display of the special symbol is not performed is a predetermined time. This means that the period during which the game ball does not enter or pass through the specific winning opening continues for a predetermined time or longer, the period during which the game ball is not launched continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the like. The end condition of this standby demo effect is when the interrupted state of the game is released (when the game is started or restarted), and for example, the player touches the launch handle 12 (the launch handle 12 is operated). That) is detected by the touch sensor, or when there is a ball entering the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, which is a specific winning opening, and the game ball passes through the operating gate 53. And general winning openings 61 to 64 are not applicable (even if the game ball passes through the operating gate 53 or the general winning openings 61 to 64 are entered, the standby demonstration production does not end). Also, during the standby demo effect, the volume is zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than the state where the standby demo effect is not (during the game). The volume adjustment screen, which will be described later, can be displayed, and the standby demo effect does not end even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, in a situation where the game is interrupted, it is not necessary to produce more than necessary, so the sound is muted or the volume is reduced, but even in that state, the standby demo effect is maintained (the game is interrupted). (While showing that), the volume related to the production after the standby demo production is completed (the game is in progress, that is, the design is changing) can be adjusted after visualizing it even during the standby demo production.

FIG. 29 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. The production control means 220 receives a handle state production command from the main control board 100 when the player's contact is detected by the touch sensor during the standby demonstration production. The execution of the effect is finished, and the execution of the game start preparation effect (launch detection effect) is started. The game start preparation effect is, for example, a production in which the characters "Welcome" are displayed on the screen or the voice "Welcome" is output from the speaker 11 to give the feeling that the game has started or resumed (a production that welcomes the game). ). This game start preparation effect is an effect performed immediately after the standby demo effect is completed, and is executed when the game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), similarly to this standby demo effect.

In the present embodiment, in the game state (non-special game state) in which the game start preparation effect can be performed, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed, and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be performed. In the state (special game state), the game start preparation effect is not performed. That is, the game start preparation effect and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect are not performed in the same game state, and of course, they are not executed in duplicate at the same timing.

(Sound notification when power is turned off and back)
In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the special game, when the power is restored from the power interruption, a power restoration notification effect for notifying that the power is restored from the power interruption is executed. This power off / return notification effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) and outputting a sound indicating that the power has been restored from the speaker 11 (power restoration notification sound). Is. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the power return effect (output time of the power return notification sound) is longer than "29 seconds", which is the maximum time of one round game (long open round game), "30". It is set to "seconds". For example, when the power is cut off in the middle of a predetermined round game and the power is turned off and restored from the middle of the predetermined round game (when restarted from the middle of the predetermined round game), at least during the remaining time of the round game. Since the power off / returning sound is output, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the round game is restarted. Here, when the power off / return sound and the big hit medium effect sound compete with each other, the power off / return sound is prioritized over the big hit medium effect sound (for example, the power off / return sound is output at a louder sound level than the big hit medium effect sound). Or stop the output of the effect sound during the big hit). Further, when the power off / return sound is output, even if an over-winning occurs in the round game after restarting, the power-off / return sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound (for example, the power-off / return sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound). The return sound may be output at a high audio level, or the output of the over winning sound may be stopped). In addition, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is longer than the output time of the voice indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification voice) so that it can be recognized that the jackpot is being hit. It is desirable to make it short. For example, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is 15 seconds, and the output time of the voice indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification voice) is 30. It is desirable to use seconds. In addition, in the situation where the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is displayed, the effect during the big hit is not displayed, so the cumulative number of prize balls display and highlight display, the over prize image and the bonus prize image are displayed. It will not be displayed. In addition, when the power is turned off and restored, the effect information regarding the cumulative prize ball value held before the power is turned off is erased. Therefore, an image showing that the power is restored when the power is turned off and restored (power restoration). When the display of the notification image) is completed and the effect of the big hit is displayed, the cumulative prize ball number display will be restarted from zero (“0”), and the highlighting display condition (reaching a specific value) Since it will be reset (as well as the conditions until the power is turned off), the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power is turned off reaches a specific value when the ball enters the next large winning opening 54 (for example, 10,000). Even if the number is 9999 in front of the above, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed at zero during the big hit after the power is cut off and the power is turned off, so in this situation, go to the big winning opening 54. Even if there is one ball in, it will not be highlighted. In addition, when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored when the power is turned off and on (power restoration notification image) is completed and the effect of a big hit is displayed, the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) While the image is displayed, if there is a ball in the large winning opening 54 or a ball in the general winning opening 64, the winning ball corresponding to the entry is paid out, but the image showing that the power is restored ( While the power return notification image) is being displayed, the over-winning image is not displayed, the bonus winning image is displayed, the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed, and the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is not performed. At that time, even if (1) the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is finished and the effect is restored during the big hit, the cumulative prize ball number display may be started from zero. Then, (2) when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is completed and the effect is restored during the big hit, the cumulative prize ball number display is an image indicating that the power has been restored (power supply). The cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed by adding the numerical values of the prize ball payouts corresponding to the entry into the large winning opening 54 and the entry into the general winning opening 64 while the return notification image) is being displayed. In addition, the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is being executed before the power is turned off, and the count-up effect has not yet been completed, and the prize ball corresponding to the count-up effect. If the power is cut off when the payout is being executed and has not been completed yet (for example, when the count-up effect for 300 prize balls and the payout are in progress), the power is turned on after the power is restored. The rest of the count-up effect that was executed before the interruption occurred will not be performed, but the prize balls that have not yet been paid out will be paid out.

(Right-handed notification image)
During the execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 17 above, the right-handed display area 731 of the screen is used to urge the player to right-handed (launch a game ball aiming at the right-handed area PA2). The hit notification image is displayed. Further, in the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A of the screen, an over-winning image is displayed when an over-winning occurs. The right-handed display area 731 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Further, during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning image is displayed in the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B of the screen, triggered by the occurrence of the bonus winning. The right-handed display area 731 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated during the execution of the special game, the over-winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the right-handed notification image, and one of the information does not hide the other information. There is.

(Volume adjustment screen)
FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing a volume adjustment screen of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the left and right keys of the cross key are simultaneously operated by the player during the execution of the special game, the volume adjustment images indicating the volume levels of a plurality of stages are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area 736 of the screen. Will be done. The volume adjustment image shows the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the display mode is adjusted to the third stage volume level corresponding to the current volume level. Then, by operating the left key or the right key by the player, it is possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of the sound such as BGM and sound effect output from the speaker 11. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is being displayed, operating the right key raises the volume level, and operating the left key lowers the volume level.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the special game is being executed, further, the over-winning effect is being executed (the situation where the over-winning sound is being output), or the bonus winning effect is being executed (bonus). Regardless of the situation in which the winning sound is output), the volume of the speaker 11 can be adjusted by the player operating the left and right keys. Therefore, the volume is adjusted by the player during the execution of the over-winning effect (the situation where the over-winning sound is output) or during the execution of the bonus winning effect (the situation where the bonus winning sound is output). In that case, the adjusted volume level will change in real time as the volume level of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound currently being output. That is, if the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is changed in the middle by the volume adjustment operation by the player, the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound is different before and after the volume adjustment operation. It becomes possible to make it. The audio image display area 736 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Similarly, the audio image display area 736 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap with each other. Therefore, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated during the execution of the special game, the over-winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and one of the information does not hide the other information. .. The highlighting and volume adjustment screens are superimposed when they are executed at the same time, but the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority, and when superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighting. (Part or all of the highlighting is hidden on the volume control screen).

≪Conditions for excessive winning errors in general winning openings≫
The "error occurrence condition" is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, when the main control board 100 determines that a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect control command (error effect designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, and the effect is produced. An error notification effect is performed by the control board 200.

Hereinafter, as one of the plurality of types of error occurrence conditions, the excess winning error occurrence conditions of the general winning openings 61 to 64 will be described. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the condition for generating an excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the condition for generating an excessive winning error of the general winning opening 64 are set to different conditions.

The condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is the number of game balls entered into the general winning openings 61 to 63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning opening switch 611). Is a condition that is satisfied when the number reaches the first specified number. The first specified number is set to, for example, "30". That is, when 30 game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 in 30 seconds, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is satisfied.

The condition for generating an excessive winning error of the general winning opening 64 is that the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 64 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the right general winning opening switch 641) is the second specified number. It is a condition that is satisfied when the value is reached. The second specified number is set to, for example, "60". That is, when 60 game balls enter the general winning opening 64 in 30 seconds, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 is satisfied.

As a modification of the present embodiment, conditions for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be set according to the type of the game state currently being executed. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is the main game state (normal game state), the general winning openings 61 to 63 have a relative ball entry frequency per unit time than the general winning openings 64. Therefore, the threshold value for satisfying the condition is set to be higher in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 than in the condition for generating the excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 under the predetermined conditions (predetermined winning frequency), the excessive winning error condition is not satisfied, but the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. If a prize is won under a predetermined condition (a predetermined frequency of winning a ball), an excessive winning error will occur. On the other hand, in the game state (probability variation game state, time-saving game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main component, the general winning opening 64 has a higher ball entry frequency per unit time than the general winning openings 61 to 63. Is supposed to be relatively high, so it is set so that the threshold value for satisfying the condition is higher in the condition for generating the excess winning error in the general winning opening 64 than in the condition for generating the excess winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63. ing. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 under specific conditions (specific winning frequency), the excessive winning error does not hold, but the game ball is specified as the general winning opening 61 to 64. If the ball is entered under the conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excessive winning error will occur.

Even if the conditions for generating the excess winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 64 are set to different conditions, the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is canceled. It is preferable to set the condition and the condition for canceling the excessive winning error of the right general winning opening 64 to the same condition. The error release condition is, for example, a condition for ending the error notification effect (for example, 30 seconds have passed from the display of the error notification screen / the start of the error notification sound), and the on-output of the outer end signal related to the excessive winning error. The condition for stopping (the condition for turning off the output, for example, 300 seconds have passed from the start of output), the power is turned off once, and then the power is restored.

≪Overlapping prize-winning production and bonus prize-winning production≫
FIG. 31 is a time chart used to explain the overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In the present embodiment, when the over prize and the bonus prize occur at substantially the same timing, the over prize effect and the bonus prize effect can be executed in duplicate. The overlapping execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over-winning effect and the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus winning effect overlap, and the execution period of both effects. There are cases where all of the above overlap and cases where part of the execution period of both effects overlap. In the illustrated example, the case where the execution period of the over winning effect and the execution period of the bonus winning effect partially overlap is shown. When the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed in duplicate, the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A in which the over-winning image is displayed and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B in which the bonus winning image is displayed are displayed. Is provided as a display area that is independent of each other, so that the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not superimposed and displayed before and after. On the other hand, the over winning sound and the bonus winning sound may be output in duplicate, or only one of them may be output. If only one is output, the first prize may be prioritized (that is, the first prize is the prize for the large prize opening 54, and the second prize is the prize for the general prize opening 64). In that case, priority is given to the over winning sound, and if the first winning is the winning of the general winning opening 64 and the later winning is the winning of the large winning opening 54, the bonus winning sound is given priority), later The winning may be prioritized (that is, the first winning is the winning of the large winning opening 54,
If the later prize is a prize to the general prize opening 64, the bonus winning sound is prioritized, the first prize is the prize to the general prize opening 64, and the latter prize is the prize to the large prize opening 54. In that case, priority is given to the over winning sound). When giving priority to the first prize, for example, if there is a later prize during the output of the prize sound related to the first prize, the prize sound related to the later prize is output after the prize sound related to the first prize is completely output. The output may be started, or the winning sound related to the later winning may not be output at all. When giving priority to the later winning, for example, if there is a later winning while outputting the winning sound related to the earlier winning, the winning sound related to the earlier winning is interrupted with the later winning as an opportunity, and then later. The winning sound related to the winning of the above may be started to be output.

As a modification of the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus winning are generated at substantially the same timing, the over-winning image and the bonus winning image may not be displayed in duplicate. That is, when the over-winning and the bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, the display period (or display timing) of the over-winning image and the display period (or display timing) of the bonus winning image do not overlap. Good. In that case, there are cases where the entire display period of both images does not overlap and cases where a part of the display periods of both images do not overlap.

If the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in duplicate, the one who won the prize first in the bonus winning image and the over-winning image (the one whose game ball was detected first). The winning image may be configured to be displayed preferentially. In addition, as the opposite configuration, when the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in duplicate, the one who won the prize later in time among the bonus winning image and the over-winning image (later the winning ball is won The winning image of the detected one) may be preferentially displayed.

(Multiple over prizes)
FIG. 32 is a time chart when over-winning and bonus winning occur a plurality of times within a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, when multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), the over-winning effect is performed for the first over-winning (winning of the 11th game ball). However, the over-winning effect is not performed for the second and subsequent over-winning (winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls). That is, if multiple over-winning effects occur within a predetermined period, only the execution of the first over-winning effect is permitted, and the execution of the second and subsequent over-winning effects is restricted (regulated). ). However, the prize balls will be paid out twice due to the over-winning, and the large prize opening count-up production due to the over-winning will also be performed twice (the first large winning opening count-up production will be performed twice without interruption). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), a bonus prize production is performed for each of the bonus prizes each time, and the prize is awarded by the bonus prize. The ball payout is also performed twice, and the general winning opening count-up effect by the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general winning opening count-up effect is performed twice without interruption). That is, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period, the execution of all the bonus prizes is allowed a plurality of times. As a modification, when multiple over-winnings occur within a predetermined period, the over-winning effect is performed for the first over-winning (the winning of the 11th game ball), and the second and subsequent over-winnings are performed. It is configured so that the over-winning effect is also performed for the over-winning (the winning of the 12th and subsequent game balls), but if there is a second over-winning effect during the execution of the first over-winning effect, ( 1) After the first over-winning effect is completed (after it is completed), the execution of the second over-winning effect is started, or (2) even if the first over-winning effect is in the middle. It may be configured to interrupt with the second over-winning as an opportunity, and then start the execution of the second over-winning effect. In that case, in either case (1) or (2), the prize ball will be paid out twice due to the over prize, and the grand prize opening count-up effect due to the over prize will also be performed twice (the first large prize opening count). It is preferable that the up production is performed twice without interruption). Furthermore, if multiple bonus prizes occur within a predetermined period, the bonus prize production will be performed for the first bonus prize, and the bonus prize production will be performed for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, if there is a second or subsequent bonus prize during the execution of the first bonus prize production, (3) after the first bonus prize production is completed (after it is completed), the second time Or (4) Even if the first bonus prize production is in the middle, it is interrupted by the second bonus prize, and then the execution of the second bonus prize production is started. It may be configured as follows. In that case, in any of (3) and (4), the prize ball is paid out twice by the bonus prize, and the general prize opening count-up production by the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general prize opening count). It is preferable that the up production is performed twice without interruption).

≪External information signal≫
In the present embodiment, the external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal plate 600 to an external device outside the machine as external information includes, for example, a prize ball signal, a big hit signal, a continuous villa signal, and a symbol confirmation signal. , Door frame opening signal, security signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included.

Here, external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device installed above the gaming machine PM and displaying data (game information) related to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each game machine (this game machine PM is one of them) based on the external information signal output from each game machine installed in the hall in the game store, and each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the game machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the game machine PM without going through a data display.

(Prize ball signal)
The prize ball signal is an external information signal that is output for a predetermined time each time a predetermined number (“10” in the present embodiment) of game balls are paid out from the game machine. That is, in the present embodiment, every time 10 prize balls are paid out, the prize ball signal is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). In the present embodiment, the prize ball number counter for counting the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 is provided, and one game ball is provided by the payout detection switch provided in the prize ball payout unit 34. Each time it is detected, "1" is added to the prize ball number counter. Then, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the prize ball signal is output from the external information terminal plate 600. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (that is, it is counted from the initial value "0").

FIG. 33 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the general prize opening 64. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given based on one game ball entering the general prize opening 64 is "3". Therefore, when the entry of the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. To. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "6" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), The value of the prize ball number counter after addition does not reach a predetermined number, and the prize ball signal is not output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), after addition. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches a predetermined number once, the prize ball signal is output once. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prize ball signal is output even once when one game ball enters the general prize opening 64 (the trigger is that the general winning opening normal winning effect is executed once). In some cases, the prize ball signal is output once. In the above description, of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the general winning opening 64 has been described as an example, but the same can be said for the general winning openings 61 to 63.

FIG. 34 is a time chart of the prize ball signal when the game ball enters the large prize opening 54. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given based on one game ball entering the large winning opening 54 is "15". Therefore, when the entry of the game ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 541, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. .. At this time, if the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "4" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is predetermined. By reaching the number once, the prize ball signal will be output once. On the other hand, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in the range of "5" to "9" (corresponding to "5" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is a predetermined number. By reaching the above twice, the prize ball signal is output twice. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prize is given when one game ball enters the large winning opening 54 (when the large winning opening normal winning effect or the large winning opening over winning effect is executed once). The ball signal may be output once, or the prize ball signal may be output twice.

<Relationship with other big hit productions>
Next, the relationship between the winning-related production (large winning opening winning production, general winning opening winning production) and other big hit medium production will be described. In the following, as other jackpot productions, (C) pending ream suggestion production, (D) promotion production, and (E) special production will be illustrated.

≪C. Hold ream suggestion production ≫
The hold consecutive suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the hold inner consecutive villa is established (there is a big hit hold) during the execution of the special game. As described above, the "holding inner villa" is a special case related to the operating holding ball when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding operating holding ball becomes a big hit. It is planned that a big hit will be made in one or more subsequent operation holding balls existing at a predetermined timing between the time when the hit / fail judgment of the symbol is permitted and the end of the special game executed with the big hit as a trigger. It means that the operation hold ball (also called "big hit hold") is included. In the present embodiment, the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the end of the special game is also the specific game. In the case of a state (high base state), that is, when the consecutive villa is continuing, if there is a big hit hold in the hold, the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed in the special game currently being executed. To put it the other way around, if the game state at the time of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the normal game state (low base state), even if the big hit hold exists in the hold, it is currently The pending ream suggestion effect is not executed in the special game being executed. Further, it is preferable that the special game currently being executed is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, and it is also preferable that the jackpot hold in the hold is also the hold related to the second special symbol. ..

In the present embodiment, the execution timing of the hold continuous suggestion effect is set to the jackpot end demonstration period as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14. Whether or not the hold continuous suggestion effect can be executed is performed at the start of the special game execution, and is determined by lottery when the hold continuous suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied at the start of the special game execution. As a modification, even if the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed when the player wins the execution lottery that is triggered by the fact that the hold continuous suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied immediately before or at the start of the jackpot end demo. Good.

The execution condition of the pending ream suggestion effect is based on the assumption that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), and within the operation-holding ball of one or more special symbols. Is a condition that is satisfied when a jackpot hold that is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) is included in. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the operation hold ball of the special symbol, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold is not a high profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot), it is held. The continuous suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in a situation where there are multiple jackpot holds in the operation hold ball of the special symbol, the jackpot type related to the first jackpot hold is a low profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the later jackpot hold is a high profit jackpot. Does not execute the hold ream suggestion effect in the special game currently being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special game, a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is generated by the variable display within a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the special game. Not only is it definite that it will occur, but it is also definite that the next special game after the special game in which the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed is not a low-profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot). In this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted in which the operation hold ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation hold ball of the first special symbol. The target operation holding ball is limited to the operation holding ball of the second special symbol.

The pending ream suggestion effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot end demo period and displays a special image that does not appear in any other scene. Examples of this special image include an effect image composed of a still image, an effect image composed of a moving image, and an effect image composed of both a still image and a moving image.

In the present embodiment, the pending continuous suggestion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). That is, the pending continuous suggestion effect can be executed only in the super-juvenile big hit effect as a big hit medium effect pattern. On the other hand, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game). That is, the over-winning production and the bonus winning production can be executed in any of the super-jumping jackpot production, the Kotobuki jackpot A production, the Kotobuki jackpot B production, the Ki jackpot A production, and the Ki jackpot B production as the jackpot medium production pattern.

In the present embodiment, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during the execution of the pending continuous suggestion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the hold continuous suggestion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. That is, the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, while the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Because. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the hold consecutive suggestion effect and the over-winning effect are not executed in duplicate, and the hold consecutive suggestion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed in duplicate. The production and the over-winning production or the bonus winning production are executed independently. As a modification, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed during the round game, and in that case, the hold continuous suggestion effect and the over winning effect may be executed in duplicate, or the hold continuous suggestion effect may be executed. The bonus winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the hold consecutive suggestion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over winning image or the bonus winning image is displayed on the back or is not displayed. (Display), and if a special sound effect is generated during the hold continuous suggestion production, this special sound effect is given priority and output (the volume of the over prize sound or bonus prize sound is reduced, or It may be configured so that it does not output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the hold continuous suggestion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Since the reserved inner consecutive villa is a reward with a higher degree of profit for the player than the over prize and the bonus prize, the execution time of the reserved inner consecutive villa production is set relatively long, and the player misses it. I try not to.

In the present embodiment, the hold inner villa production is executed only as a "truth production" that deterministically notifies the establishment of the hold inner villa, but as a modification thereof, the hold inner villa is actually used. You may include the "Gase production" that has not been established. In this example, as one of the execution conditions for the production of the consecutive villas in the hold, it is a condition that the preceding operation hold ball is a big hit hold of a high profit big hit (16R big hit), but it is limited to this. Rather, the preceding operation hold ball may be a jackpot hold other than a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), that is, a jackpot hold corresponding to a low profit jackpot (4R jackpot).

Further, by changing the display mode of the cumulative prize ball number display from the normal display mode (for example, white display) to the special display mode (gold display), it may be suggested that the pending villa is established. Further, the hold continuous suggestion effect may be performed at the execution timing of the highlight effect (highlighting) performed when the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that the reserved inner villa is established by the display mode of the emphasis effect.

<< D. Promotion production ≫
The promotion effect suggests or notifies the profit mode (referred to as "provisional profit mode" for convenience) related to the jackpot before or at the start of the special game when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the special symbol. After that, it is an effect suggesting whether or not the actual profit mode related to the jackpot has a higher profit degree than the provisional profit mode during the execution of the special game. In other words, it suggests whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (the profit mode as it is) or false (high profit mode), and through the series of processes, the jackpot It is a production that shows whether or not the profit mode of is promoted (changed).

The types of promotion production are roughly divided into round promotion production and probabilistic promotion production. In the round promotion effect, when it is uncertain whether the specified number of special games (provisional specified number of rounds) suggested or notified when a big hit occurs is the true number of rounds or the false number of rounds, after that provisional number of rounds Is also a production that suggests the possibility that the round game will continue. Some of the round promotion effects simply suggest that the round has been promoted, and some suggest that the round is promoted as well as the true specified number of rounds or the number of long open rounds. The probabilistic promotion effect is a state in which it is uncertain whether the jackpot type (provisional jackpot type) suggested or notified when a jackpot occurs is a true jackpot type or a false jackpot type (whether or not it is a specific jackpot). ), It is an effect that suggests the possibility of shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the special game. In the present embodiment, it is definite that the promotion is successful when the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probabilistic promotion effect) occurs during the execution of the special game.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 16, the probabilistic promotion effect is when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won in the normal game state, or in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the second special symbol " It is executed when "Ki jackpot B production" is selected as the production pattern during the jackpot when "4R specific jackpot" is won. The execution timing of this probabilistic promotion effect is set during the jackpot end demo period. In this probabilistic promotion effect, the movable accessory 24 is dropped and moved so as to overlap the screen, and then the movable accessory 24 is moved upward again to display the title "Shoudai Hit" on the exposed screen. By doing so, it is a production content that makes it appear as if it has been promoted from "Ki jackpot production" to "Shou jackpot production" (the jackpot type has been promoted from 4R normal jackpot to 4R specific jackpot).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 14, when the second special symbol "16 specific jackpot" is won in the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the round promotion effect is the "jutsu jackpot B effect" as the effect pattern during the jackpot. Is selected. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round. This round promotion effect is performed after displaying the characters "final round" (fake display) on the screen to make it appear as if the currently running round game is the final round game. By displaying the cut-in image of the message "That's not the case!" Issued by the main characters of the game, and then displaying the title "Super-jump jackpot", "Super-jump jackpot production" to "Superju jackpot production" It is a production content that makes it look as if it was promoted to (the jackpot type was promoted from 4R specific jackpot to 16R specific jackpot).

In the present embodiment, the round promotion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is "16R special game (high profit special game)", but the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are currently being executed. Is configured so that the special game can be executed as either a "16R special game (high profit special game)" or a "4R special game (low profit special game)".

Further, in the present embodiment, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during the execution of the probabilistic promotion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the probabilistic promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. In other words, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, while the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. Is. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the probabilistic promotion effect and the over-winning effect are not executed at the same time, and the probabilistic promotion effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed at the same time. The prize-winning effect or the bonus prize-winning effect is executed independently. As a modification, the probability variation promotion effect may be executed during the round game, in which case the probability variation promotion effect and the over-winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and the probability variation promotion effect and the bonus winning effect may be executed in duplicate. And may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the probabilistic promotion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over-winning image or the bonus winning image is displayed or hidden on the back). Also, if a special sound effect is generated during the probabilistic promotion effect, this special sound effect is given priority and output (the volume of the over-winning sound or bonus winning sound is reduced or not output). You can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be duplicated during the execution of the round promotion effect. That is, since the round promotion effect is executed from the 4th round to the interval period of the 4th round, if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs within the interval period, the execution period of the round promotion effect ( (Execution timing) and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may overlap. In addition, the round promotion effect has a higher display priority (displaying or hiding the display of the over winning image and the bonus winning image on the back), and a special sound effect is generated during the round promotion effect. In this case, the dedicated sound effect may be preferentially output (the volume of the over winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be reduced or not output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the probabilistic promotion effect is set to the start of the jackpot end demo. It is set to "20 seconds" from the time to the end. On the other hand, the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect is set to "0.5 seconds" respectively. Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In addition, the execution time of the probabilistic promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

≪E. Special production ≫
The special production is a highly rare production that is executed when a predetermined consecutive villa condition is satisfied. The "predetermined consecutive villa condition" means that the number of consecutive villas for big hits reaches the specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment), and at least the specified number of times (20th in this embodiment) is the highest type of big hit. It is a condition that is satisfied when it becomes a profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot). This special effect appears during the execution of the special game (16R special game) that is performed when the specified number of big hits (20th) occurs. However, this special production ends in the final round game (16th round) and does not include the end demo period after that (however, even if the final interval period is included, the final interval period is included. It may not be included). In addition, this special effect is composed of an effect content (special movie) in which the highly rare premier characters of this model are displayed one by one in order.

In addition to the specified number of consecutive villas, for example, the cumulative number of 16R specific jackpots in the consecutive villa state reaches the predetermined number of times (the 16R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is the specified number of times). It may be added as a condition (consecutive), the total number of rounds won in the consecutive villa state, and the cumulative number of prize balls reaching a predetermined number. Here, as described above, the "renso (renso state)" is a gaming state during the non-special gaming state, after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific gaming state to the specific gaming state. It refers to a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state (a state in which big hits in the specific game state are continuously generated). The "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than that of a normal game state. In a broad sense, a special symbol probability fluctuation function, a special symbol fluctuation time reduction function, and an electric chew support It is a gaming state in which any one of the functions is operating. In the present embodiment, the specific game state means at least a game state in which the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main body of the game.

In the present embodiment, the special effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game) or a low-profit special game (4R special game).

In the present embodiment, even if an over-winning or bonus winning effect occurs during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. The reason is that when the special production and the over-winning production or the bonus winning production compete with each other, it is better to give priority to the execution of the highly rare special production (display of the premier character that can be seen only in the special production). This is because the result is satisfactory for the player.

As a modification of the present embodiment, if an over-winning or bonus winning effect occurs during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may be duplicated. When the special effect and the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect are executed in duplicate, the display priority of the special effect (layer priority) is higher than the display priority of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect (layer priority). It is preferable that the priority) is set higher. However, while the special effect is an effect that is displayed large on the entire screen, the over-winning effect and the bonus prize-winning effect are effects that are displayed smaller toward the edge of the screen, so the display priority of the special effect. The display priority (layer priority) of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect may be set higher than the (layer priority).

In the present embodiment, the execution time of the special effect is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the jackpot start demo to the end of the final round game (16th round). On the other hand, the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect is set to "0.5 seconds" respectively. Therefore, the execution time of the special effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

If the power is cut off during the execution of the special game (for example, when the power supply to the game machine is cut off due to a power failure or the like), if an over prize or a bonus prize is generated after the power is cut off. After the power is turned off, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is executed. This can be executed because the decision to execute the over-winning effect and the decision to execute the bonus-winning effect are triggered by the over-winning or the bonus-winning, that is, the event after the power is turned off and restored. On the other hand, the effect control command for power failure / recovery transmitted from the main control board 100 after the power failure / recovery does not include data for restoration of the hold continuous suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect, and also. Since the power supply of the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200 is not backed up, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the special game, even if the execution condition of each effect is satisfied or the execution opportunity comes at the time of the power failure, the special game is executed. With regard to the pending continuous suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect that determine whether or not the game can be executed at the start of the game, there will be no data on whether or not the effect can be executed after the power is turned off. Is not executed in.

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing on the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 48. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes a main control side main processing and a main control side timer interrupt processing.

<< Main processing on the main control side >>
35 to 36 are flowcharts showing the main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program is started and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as the initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set as the initial value of the stack area in the stack pointer (S1), and the access permission of the RAM 103 is performed (S2). Subsequently, a vector table in which the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the internal register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero-cleared in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power off information flag is read to determine whether or not the power off normal information is stored (S6).

Here, when the information on the normal power off is stored (S6: YES), the checksum is calculated for the predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it is backed up normally, the checksum at power-on will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of turning on the power whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, when the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at the time of turning on the power is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (S11).

Next, in the power-off / recovery setting process, the power-on normal information is set, various errors are initially set, and the communication with the payout control board 400 is initially set in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on was performed correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the information of the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and the data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power off is read, and the power off / return process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power off / return command”) at the time of power failure / recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is performed (S15). This power off / return command includes information on the communication line inspection, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy entry states, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. The untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of operation-holding balls is requested ( S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is made to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 52 is in the open state) (S17). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 542 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 54 is opened) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (a flag indicating that the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, the clear word 1 (“55H”) is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read and it is determined whether or not the power failure has occurred (S23). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, in this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S25), the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition processing (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but S21 to S25 are used by utilizing the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing. Repeat the process up to. Then, when an interrupt request is made in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, when the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, when the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 and the following power-off processing is executed.

Next, as the power cutoff processing (S26 to S32), first, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power off information flag is the power-on normal data (S27). When it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, when the power-on normal information is not obtained (S27: No), the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

Next, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by writing the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 in order to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within the preset timeout time. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before the time-out occurs. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, the input process is executed (S53). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first start port switch 511, the second start port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor. , Radio sensor, etc. are read, their status is judged, and these detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (S54). In this various random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, a random number per normal symbol, a soft random number per special symbol, and a symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". When the value of the counter goes around once, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, the timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by the interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the fluctuation display and the stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72. A predetermined fluctuation time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. If a small hit game of the other special symbol is executed during the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the small hit games is being executed. The timekeeping of the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and as the determination result, the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set.

Next, the winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the large winning port switch 541, and the general winning port switch 611, 641 in the input process (S53) is used. Based on this, when the switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed and it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch as a result, the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition to temporarily storing the game ball, it also requests transmission of an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch. The details of this winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 in order to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize type, and the payout control board 400 is used, based on the detection result in the above-mentioned prize ball monitoring process. The data received from is monitored and the communication inspection with the payout control board 400 is performed.

Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation hold ball information. , The number of balls on hold for operation is updated up to a maximum of 4, and the random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery are stored.

Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 is performed, the normal symbol changing process and the normal symbol stop symbol display process are performed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. , Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessory, processing during demonstration of termination of operation of ordinary electric accessory, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol changing process, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable manner or to confirm it.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, when the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored and it is determined that the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, one normal symbol operation pending ball number is digested and the normal symbol is activated. The hit / fail judgment, the symbol judgment, the fluctuation pattern judgment, the fluctuation time setting, and the like are performed in order.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start port monitoring control process, the winning of the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 of the game ball is monitored, and if the game ball is won, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is related. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbol storage, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the special symbol change start process (S420) and the special symbol change process (S430), which will be described in detail later, are processed according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), Processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, the special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation start and end of the special electric accessory 542 are set as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 542, and the operation is large. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 54 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability fluctuation function, the operation start setting of the fluctuation time shortening function, the setting of the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the like are executed in order.

Next, the large winning opening validity period setting process is executed (S67). In this large winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the large winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the large winning opening 54 is set as the determination result.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, one reserved ball is digested, a command request for the number of symbol storage numbers, and a judgment as to whether the special symbol is correct or not. , Design determination of special symbol, determination of probability fluctuation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric accessory, setting of demo production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , Determine whether the game machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball entry passage time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball entry passage time abnormality is set and the effect control command (“error”) including the error information is set. In addition to requesting the effect designation command "), it also requests the output of a security signal to be output to the external terminal.

Next, the game status display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 is continuously operated (specified number of rounds), the number of balls on hold for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. In addition, display data for displaying the error state information detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, the LED output process is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), which displays the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error, and the like. The display data created by the abnormality detection process (S69), the game status display process (S71), etc. is displayed on each special symbol display device 71, 72, normal symbol display device 75, each special symbol hold lamp 73, 74, and normal figure hold. The data is output to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, and the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, the launch control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to allow the game ball to be launched. To do. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

Next, the solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) were acquired in order to operate each electric accessory 542. Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643.

Next, the effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect is produced. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

Next, the external information output process is executed (S76). In this external information output processing, the game information related to the game machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal plate 600. Examples of the external information signal include a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (ball entry passage time abnormality, etc.) signal, a jackpot signal, and a continuous villa signal. There is a symbol confirmation signal and so on.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold value) during the main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-masqueradable interrupt is generated and the power outage confirmation flag is turned on. To do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-mentioned power off processing (S)
26 to S32) will be executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, the first start port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 511 is input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a first start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the second start port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second start port switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 521 has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, the second start opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second start port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Next, the operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 is input. When the detection signal from the operating gate switch 531 is input, the operating gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operating gate is won. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the large winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the large winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541 is input, the large winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , A large winning opening winning command is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the large winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

Subsequently, the left general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the left general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input. When the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input, the left general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered any of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is used as the winning data of the main information storage means 180. In addition to temporarily storing in the storage area, a left general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611, the winning monitoring process this time is terminated.

Subsequently, the right general winning opening switch process is executed (S106). In the right general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input. When the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input, the right general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a right general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641, the winning monitoring process this time is terminated.

≪Special design game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. Applies to.

(Starting port monitoring control process)
First, the start port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When the winning of the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the lottery random number values related to the first special symbol game include a random value per special symbol, a random value per symbol, and a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S203). And
As an update of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol is added by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 51 is completed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning of the game to the second starting port 52 is detected (S205). When the winning of the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (S206). When the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the lottery random value related to the second special symbol game is a random value per special symbol, a random value per symbol, or a special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random value is acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (S207). Then, as an update of the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the number of balls on hold for the second special symbol is added by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is completed.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). When the number of operation-holding balls is updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means. It is stored in the command storage area of 180 (S210).

Next, the state of the game machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing (S211). In the case of the pre-judgment timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading judgment information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the start opening, a special symbol hit disorder is generated from the hit random number buffer (hold n storage area or register, etc.). A numerical value is read out and a pre-determination of success or failure is performed (S212). Then, a pass / fail pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Further, the symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the hit symbol random number buffer, and the symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a fluctuation pattern pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (variation pattern pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol change start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), the special symbol change start monitoring process described later is performed on the special symbol side of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that satisfies the fluctuation start condition. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, the processing on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

First, it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit or a small hit (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting for fluctuation)". It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special It is considered that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (addresses of various tables used in the subsequent processing and addresses of the RAM storage area) is set (S304). , The process shifts to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol has priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is supposed to be digested. The details of this special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). .. Here, when the number of reserved balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the change start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (hereinafter). After setting the addresses of various tables used in the processing and the addresses of the RAM storage areas (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing (S310) on the first special symbol side.

If the fluctuation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. ..

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the change start of this time is started with reference to the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above. The processing on the target special symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, the processing method on the first special symbol side It will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing or the processing on the second special symbol side.

First, the number of pending balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the start of this fluctuation, is subtracted by 1 (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation start is accessed, and the random value per special symbol and the special symbol per special symbol stored in the earliest reserved storage area (hold 1 storage area). Since the symbol random value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out in order and these random values are used for the special symbol hit / fail determination process (S320), the symbol determination process (S330), and the variation pattern selection process (S423) described later. It is transferred to the special symbol hit / miss determination area, the special symbol symbol determination area, the special symbol variation pattern determination area, and the special symbol variation addition pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, the special symbol hit / miss determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol winning / failing determination process (S320), first, the special symbol winning / failing lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the game state is the special symbol probability change state, the high-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the low-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired. Next, the random value per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / miss determination area of the main information storage means 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. Further, the values corresponding to the hit / fail determination result (big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", miss data "00H") are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Subsequently, the symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol and the character effect number (variable additional symbol information) of the special symbol are determined according to the result of the hit / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) and the character effect number of the special symbol determined this time are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group) and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (probability change on of the special symbol / probability change off of the special symbol / probability change on of the normal symbol). / Determined based on the combination with (4 patterns of probability variation off of ordinary symbols). If the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is incorrect (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit (S342: YES), after the big hit game is completed, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 above and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The number of probability fluctuations is determined as the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (S345). Further, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of times the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated after the end of the big hit game is the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened. Is determined (S346). Further, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of electric support is determined as the number of times the electric chew support function is activated after the big hit game is completed ( S347). The determination result (number of probability fluctuations, number of times of shortening of fluctuation time, number of times of electric support) is stored in the time reduction number storage area and the electric support number storage area of the main information storage means 180. Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game or after the small hit game is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state (S349). Subsequently, the demo production time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (S350). Next, the special symbol hit / fail determination area and the special symbol symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / miss determination process (S320) and symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (standby)" to "01H (start of fluctuation)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402).

When the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is used to execute the process related to the second special symbol. The address of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed in order to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The addresses of the various tables used and the addresses of the RAM storage areas) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-mentioned S403 or S404 is used, and the special subject to this change is used. The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing on the first special symbol side except in special cases? , The second special symbol side processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing. The details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, the special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), branch processing (S411 to S414) for shifting to processing according to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H") is executed. To do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is not 0 (S411). When the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (start of fluctuation)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start process (S420). The details of this special symbol variation start processing (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). The details of this special symbol change processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. If NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

(Special symbol change start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S420) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning / failing lottery, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect on the effect display device 70, a communication inspection command, a variation addition symbol information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, and a symbol designation command are generated in order, and these are used as the main information storage means. It is stored in the command storage area of 180.

Subsequently, the content of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern is cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol change)
Next, the processing during special symbol change (S430) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

First, in order to display the variation of the special symbol, the display pattern number switching process of the special symbol is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated at each predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbol in a variable display or a definite display.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has expired (S432). When the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored as the fixed display time in the special symbol game timer (S435). The "fixed display time" is a time for definitively stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is stopped fluctuating. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S436).

(Processing during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display in-process (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the final display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has expired (S441). Here, when the final display time of the special symbol ends (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stop symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the jackpot data “55H” (S443). When the hit / fail judgment data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S444), the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, "00H (off)" is set in the probability change flag, and "00H" is set in the probability fluctuation count counter, the fluctuation time shortening count counter, and the ball entry easy state count counter to clear zero.

Next, as the start demo setting process of the special game, the start demo display time is set and an effect control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the fluctuation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set in order to clear the contents of the pass / fail determination flag (S450).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination data is not the jackpot data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating (S451). When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (S451: YES), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S452). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (step S453). When the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). If the probability fluctuation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating (S455). When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S456). .. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction count counter is zero (step S457). When the fluctuation time reduction counter is zero (S457: YES), it is considered that the number of terminations of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the operation of the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S458). If the fluctuation time reduction number counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is operating (S459). When the electric chew support function is operating (S459: YES), the electric support number counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support count counter is zero (step S461). When the electric support count counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the number of times the end of the ball entry easy state has been reached. If the number of times of electric support after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is subtracted by 1 (S463). Then, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the number of times of the variation pattern selection state of the main information storage means 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset number of ends, and the number of ends is determined. If it has been reached, the state is switched to the fluctuation pattern selection state specified next. On the other hand, if the number of ends has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and fluctuation pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store in (S465). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control process)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 47 to 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric accessory game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started in each round game.

When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored as a command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area (S504). The effect control board 200 side executes a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processes S506 to S510 are executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

As a process during operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S506), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 is also determined. It is determined whether or not (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game ball wins only the specified count number (maximum number of winnings) in the large winning opening 54 (S506: YES) or the operating time of the special electric accessory 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), it is special. The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (S509). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by 1 (S510).

On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511 and the end demo display time is set as the hit end demo setting process for the special game. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction count information set in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction counter (S512). Further, the electric support count information set in S347 is stored in the electric support counter (S513).

Subsequently, with reference to the content of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation by a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). When the condition device is operated by the specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation number counter (operation data) set in S345 is stored in the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol is stored. The operation of the probability fluctuation function of (S515) is started. On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operating data “00H” is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter and S515 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction count information stored in the time reduction counter is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S516). In the case of the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number information stored in the electric support number counter is the electric chew support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). When it is the electric chew support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation start of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (S519), the operation start of the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol (S520), and the operation start of the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 (S521) are executed in order. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chew support function operation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Then, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated, and this is used by the main information storage means 180. Store in the command storage area (S523). The effect control board 200 side sets the effect mode after the special game based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S524).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing on the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 49 to 55. The processing on the effect control board 200 side includes a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. A lamp that is activated when the processing, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command activated by the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the arrival of a predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variation effect pattern are reached. It is configured to include an effect interrupt process and a transmission interrupt process of an image control command that is activated at regular intervals.

For each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur is set. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset: Top priority", "Reset start processing due to various abnormalities: Top priority" → "Reception interrupt processing of production control command: Level 7" → "WDT (when runaway is detected) The priority levels are ranked in the order of "reset start processing: level 3" → "image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2" → "effect control side timer interrupt processing: level 1". The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, or when the sub-main CPU 201 tries to access an illegal area or an illegal method. Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

In the main process on the effect control side, basically, the process proceeds after being set to either the all interrupt disabled state or the interrupt disabled state other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested (multiple interrupts occur) during the execution of the interrupt process, in principle, the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. The interrupt request is permitted, but the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level than the interrupt processing being executed or the interrupt processing has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process is processed in a state in which other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are disabled. Then, each interrupt process returns to the effect control side main process with all interrupts enabled. The priority order (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by the register setting of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

《Reset start process》
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, the reset is started by any of reset when the power is turned on, reset due to various abnormalities, and reset due to WDT (when runaway is detected), and after the security check of the sub-main CPU 201 is performed. , The program starts, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as a basic setting related to hardware, an initial value is set in the built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the variable without the initial value is initialized by clearing 0. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203.

Subsequently, interrupts other than the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in advance for each model, a process of setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Further, a request to turn off the effect lamps LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) is made to turn off all the lamps (S607). Then, the watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, the effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). The details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When shifting to the main process on the production control side in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that the process returns to this process due to a program bug or the like. Shifts to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

<< Main processing on the production control side >>
Next, the effect control side main process (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

First, an address (starting address where the program is expanded) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is accurately expanded in the RAM 203 is acquired in the main process on the effect control side (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (starting of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Next, the device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of reset), and is for controlling the operation of the movable accessory 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information required for. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared in order to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, the watchdog timer is set by writing a predetermined clear word to the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within the preset timeout time. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Subsequently, the input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output process S912 in the timer interrupt process described later is monitored for each interrupt occurrence, and is monitored a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). When all the input port states are "1", the signal level is set to "1 (H level)", when all are "0", the signal level is set to "0 (L level)", and in other cases, the signal level is set. Do not change (this confirms the input signal).

Subsequently, the error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effect by various devices is started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button notice effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within the predetermined operation effective time, and the information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored. To hold.

Subsequently, the advance notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a advance notice effect pattern that defines the contents of the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern is generated according to the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). It will be decided by lottery. The advance notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the advance notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. Further, an image control command for designating the advance notice effect pattern number on the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, when the accessory advance notice effect pattern is selected as the advance notice effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). .. In this example, all of the plurality of types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn by lottery within one main loop process, but the efficiency of the main loop processing is improved. In order to make the notice effect occur, the lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes by dividing it into each time when the notice effect occurs (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, and the fluctuation stop stage). At that time, regarding the advance notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the change of the decorative symbol, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the change of the decorative symbol (the image control command is transmitted immediately), so the lottery is performed in the starting main loop process. It is supposed to do.

Next, the device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 are stored. ), The pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, accessory notice effect number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, the lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, the one-frame time corresponds to the time required for the one-frame drawing process when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, the drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when all the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , End control of the target device.

Subsequently, the command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command is read. Executes the effect control process corresponding to the type of. The details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Then, it is determined whether or not the command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) is executed during the loop processing this time (S621). Immediately after the command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and the process proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, when the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number update process is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In the present embodiment, "16 ms", which is half the time of the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control, is set as the predetermined time. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead advance notice lottery random number, a decorative symbol random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol memory number command and a pre-determination command. When this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In this hold information management process (S634), the symbol storage number command or the pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, the look-ahead determination is executed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and the hold image of the effect display device 70 is displayed. A process for updating the number of reserved images displayed on the display unit 710 and the display mode (display color, etc.) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol fluctuation-related commands include a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation-related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation-related command stops variation. If it is a command, the process for ending the variation effect of the decorative pattern is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demo effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demo effect command. When the jackpot effect-related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), processing for executing the start demo effect, the round effect, and the end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to the small hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related commands include a small hit start demo effect command and a small hit end demo effect command. When the command related to the small hit effect is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In this small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demo effect and a small hit end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning opening winning-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the commands related to the winning opening are the first starting opening winning command, the second starting opening winning command, the operating gate winning command, the large winning opening winning command, the left general winning opening winning command, and the right general winning opening winning command. Etc. are included. When the winning opening winning-related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the winning effect content determination process (S642). The details of the winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S643). When this error effect specification command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (S644). In this error effect content determination process (S644), the error effect designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and the error state is notified by the image display of the liquid crystal display device 70, the lighting of the effect lamp LP, the sound of the speaker 11, and the like. Determine the error effect pattern for.

When the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO). Ends the command analysis process without doing anything.

(Prize production content determination process)
Next, the winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the winning effect content determination process (S642).

First, the first start opening winning effect control process is executed (S701). In this first start opening winning effect control process (S701), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the first starting opening winning command is issued. If it is stored, the first start opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 51 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, the second start opening winning effect control process is executed (S702). In this second start opening winning effect control process (S702), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the second starting opening winning command is issued. If it is stored, the second start opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 52 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, the operation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In this operation gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not the operation gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the operation gate winning command is stored, the operation gate winning command is stored. On condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied, the operation gate winning effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53 is executed.

Subsequently, the large winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S704). In this large winning opening winning effect control process (S704), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the large winning opening winning command is stored. Then, on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied, the large prize opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 54 is executed.

Subsequently, the left general winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S705). In this left general winning opening winning effect control process (S705), it is determined whether or not the left general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the left general winning opening winning command is issued. If it is stored, the left general winning opening winning effect is executed to notify that the game ball has entered any of the general winning openings 61 to 63, provided that the predetermined effect execution conditions are satisfied. ..

Subsequently, the right general winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S706). In this right general winning opening winning effect control process (S706), it is determined whether or not the right general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the right general winning opening winning command is issued. If it is stored, the right general winning opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is executed on condition that the predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

<< Reception interrupt processing of production control command >>
Next, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command. As described above, the reception interrupt process of this effect control command is started by generating an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It has become like. The effect control command has a configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. In the following, for convenience of explanation, MODE data will be referred to as “first command” and EVENT data will be referred to as “second command”.

First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command is fixed (S901). Specifically, the input value is fixed when the command data is read up to 5 times and the same value is read twice in a row. This is because the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not fixed until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether or not it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (
S902). When the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). The production lottery random number is acquired when the production control command is received, because the production control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol changes. Therefore, by taking this as an opportunity, it is necessary to prevent periodicity at the acquisition time. By making the acquisition time of the random number of the production lottery irregular in this way, inconveniences such as the same production being unnaturally and repeatedly selected in various production lottery are less likely to occur.

On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The saved command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<< Effect control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, the port input / output process is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, the device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, the drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for the effect operation control are subtracted and updated by an interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the advance notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the time such as the drive timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, the button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated by the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation effective time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is effective.

Subsequently, the task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the task counter values (“0” to “15”) are updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (lamp data update processing of S917) and runaway monitoring are assigned according to the value of the task counter. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process of S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process of S919) is executed. In this example, of the task counter values ("0" to "15"), one value is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and one other value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

Subsequently, the lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, the lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as a serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data of the transmission buffer in 1-byte units and outputs each bit to the lamp connection board 91 in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, so that all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 of the above is out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, the error management timer process is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after enabling all interrupts and restoring the saved register contents, the effect control side timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Transmission interrupt processing of image control command >>
Next, the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command. The transmission interrupt process of this image control command is generated at preset fixed intervals (500 μs).

In the transmission interrupt process of this image control command, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. When the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command is terminated, and the original processing before the interrupt is restored.

The main effects achieved in this embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the present embodiment, the over-winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 in excess of the specified count number during the execution of the special game, so that the over-winning is achieved. By clearly notifying the player of what has occurred, it is possible to increase the satisfaction and excitement of the player for being able to enjoy special benefits that would not otherwise be possible, and as a result, the interest of the game. It is possible to improve the sex.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the large winning opening winning effect (over winning effect) is performed when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game, and the game ball is the general winning opening 64. By performing a general winning opening winning production (bonus winning production) with the opportunity to enter the ball, a reduction is added between the large winning opening winning production and the general winning opening winning production performed during the execution of the special game. As a result, the monotony of the production during the big hit can be eliminated, and as a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the large winning opening 54 is provided by performing the general winning opening winning effect (bonus winning effect) when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game. It is possible to prevent the player from being the only concern of the player by aiming and advancing the game, and to allow the player to enjoy the fun of aiming at the general winning opening 64, and the player actively plays the game. It can be expected to increase the chances of the ball entering the general winning opening 64, which will enhance the gambling spirit of the player and make the game even more entertaining. As a result, the entertainingness of the game Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the big winning opening count-up effect in relation to the big hit end demo period and the interval period, the timing at which the big winning opening count-up effect is performed and the large winning opening count-up effect can be obtained. Regardless of the number of consecutive winning opening count-up effects, this large winning opening count-up effect can be completed appropriately without delaying it more than necessary. Therefore, the division between the previous and next round games and the special game and the above By clearly separating the display from the variable display after the end of the special game, it becomes possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the current game situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes. In particular, by configuring the total time of the execution time of the big prize opening count-up effect for the specified number of counts to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demo, a plurality of games are set just before the end of the final round game. Even if the game ball continuously enters the big winning opening and the big winning opening count-up effect is performed multiple times, the big winning opening count-up effect will be performed within the big hit end demo period. It will be completed. Therefore, the big winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the big hit end demo period until the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and at the end of the special game and at the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation. It is possible to clarify the delimiter.

Further, according to the present embodiment, if the execution condition of the later large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the earlier large winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the earlier large winning opening count-up effect is performed. By starting the execution of the subsequent large prize opening count-up effect after the end, it is possible to prevent the processing of the count effect from becoming complicated, and the two large winning opening count-up effects will be separated. By clarifying, the count-up display of the cumulative prize balls will not be unsightly for the player, and the player will be satisfied with how the cumulative prize balls are increasing one after another at a good tempo on the screen. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value and the emphasis effect is performed due to the occurrence of the over prize, or when the over prize occurs in the situation where the emphasis effect is performed. By executing this emphasis effect and the over-winning effect in duplicate, there are irregular timings when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific number, and irregular timings when over-prize occurs. By the appearance of both effects, it is possible to clearly notify the player that it is a rare special situation in which is matched, so that the player's sense of exhilaration and achievement can be further enhanced, and as a result, the game It is possible to improve the interest of the.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when an over-winning or bonus winning-win occurs in a situation where a specific error having a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs. By limiting the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus-winning effect, it is possible not to overlook that a serious error has occurred in the game machine. On the other hand, if an over-winning or bonus winning is generated in a situation where a non-specific error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs, an over-winning effect And even if the bonus prize-winning effect is allowed to be executed, no actual harm will occur. On the contrary, if the over-winning effect is hindered by the error notification effect, the player's willingness to play may be diminished. I'm going to do. In this way, by appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the occurrence of the over-winning according to the type of the error that has occurred in the gaming machine, the player's willingness to play the game without excessively hindering the occurrence of the over-winning effect. It is possible to improve the fun of the game because it is possible to sustain the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the consecutive villas are continued, not only during the execution of the special game but also
By displaying the cumulative number of prize balls even in the electric support state after the end of the special game, it is expected that the player will proceed with the game while expecting to further increase the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive villa, and it is a big hit. The motivation of the player for the occurrence can be further increased, and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 arranged in the right side area PA2, while the left side area PA1 By configuring so that the bonus winning effect is not executed even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 arranged in, the bonus winning effect occurs indiscriminately, and the bonus winning effect is rather monotonous. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming a rut (become a rut), and as a result of launching a game ball aiming at winning the grand prize opening 54, the joy of winning the general winning opening 64 that occurs incidentally is further enhanced. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus-winning occur at substantially the same time during the execution of the special game, the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect are duplicated to enter the large winning opening 54. As a result of playing with the aim of entering the game ball, both the over-winning and the bonus winning that occur incidentally can be clearly notified to the player, so that the fun of the special game can be further enhanced. It becomes possible to prevent the production during the big hit from becoming monotonous, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while restricting the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the jackpot end demo period, the execution of the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the interval period immediately after the final round game is executed. By allowing, one of the winning effects (over winning effect or bonus winning effect) occurs interruptively even though it is notified that the special game will end during the execution of the jackpot end demo. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being produced without a sense of unity as a whole, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus winnings occur within a predetermined period during the special game, the execution of the multiple bonus winning effects is permitted, while the predetermined during the special game. If multiple over-winnings occur within the period, only the over-winning effects corresponding to the first over-winning of the multiple over-winnings will be executed, and the over-winning effects will be dark. It is possible to prevent the over-winning effect from becoming monotonous (becoming a rut), and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the prize ball signal can be output once when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64, but one game ball enters the large winning opening 54. By configuring the prize ball signal to be output twice, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be displayed by the data display. It is possible to notify the player and use it as a judgment material for selecting a game machine or as reference information for the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls is notified by numerical information (for example, "1000 pt"), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the cumulative number of prize balls is used as image information such as an icon or a meter. It may be configured to notify by.

Further, in the above embodiment, the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect, general prize opening count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive villas has been illustrated and described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Even if the above feature configuration is applied to the count-up effect (large prize opening count-up effect, general prize opening count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls (the number of big hit middle prize balls) during the execution of one big hit game. A similar effect can be achieved.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly explained. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described in order. The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment employs a small hit RUSH in which "small hits" frequently occur as a result of a hit / fail determination of a special symbol when the gaming state is a latent probability changing gaming state. The playability of this small hit RUSH will be described later.

The validity determination of the special symbol of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / failing lottery table of the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated, and (B) is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated. ). In this special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random number range of the random number value per special symbol and the result of the winning / failing determination (big hit, small hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 56, in the winning / failing determination of the special symbol, when the game state (low probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated, the random value per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 204". If it corresponds to, it becomes a big hit, and if it is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, it is a big hit when the random number value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 818". Will be. That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability "1/320" to the high probability "1/80". In this way, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is designed to be equal between the winning / failing determination of the first special symbol and the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the hit / fail judgment does not correspond to the big hit, the small hit is won with a relatively high probability of "1 / 1.1" in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol. The winning probability of a small hit is designed to have the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In this second embodiment, a small hit is set only for the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol. For example, a small hit is also set for the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, and the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is performed. Also, the winning / failing judgment of the second special symbol may be configured to win a small hit with a higher probability.

In the second embodiment, the result of the hit / fail judgment of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a big hit, and while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable display of the jackpot), the other is When the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol of is executed, it is prohibited to derive the big hit as a result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol, and only the small hit or the miss is derived. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the result of the hit / miss judgment is forcibly replaced with the hit. That is, in the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table, when the special symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated in the gaming state (low probability state), the random value per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 204". In this case, if the result of the applicability judgment is forcibly missed (replaced from the jackpot to miss) and the game state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the special symbol hit disorder When the numerical value corresponds to the range of "0 to 818", the result of the applicability determination is forcibly out of order (replaced from the big hit to out of order). As a modified example, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol winning / failing lottery table, a table for jackpot non-lottery that does not include the jackpot judgment value (random number range) as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the special symbol is prepared. During the variable display of the big hit of the special symbol, the small hit lottery is performed in which the result of the winning / failing judgment is only a small hit or a miss by referring to the table dedicated to the big hit no lottery process instead of the above special symbol winning / failing lottery table. The method may be adopted. In this modified example, if the specifications are such that a small hit is not set as a result of the hit / fail judgment, a method of immediately determining the loss may be adopted without performing the hit / fail judgment.

Next, the jackpot type (big hit breakdown) of the second embodiment will be described. In this second embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is "big hit", the jackpot type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to the special symbol jackpot symbol table shown in FIG. 57.

FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, the jackpot type, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 of each round are displayed for the symbol random value per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific jackpot (design group A), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), the 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and the 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D) have four rounds specified for the jackpot game, and a big prize in one round game. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

FIG. 57 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, the symbol group, jackpot type, specified number of rounds of jackpot game, and opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 of each round are displayed for the symbol random value per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot. It is sorted into (symbol group I). In the 10R specific jackpot (design group E), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific jackpot (design group F), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and the 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) have four specified rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game. ) Is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I), the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Of the various jackpot types, each jackpot except for the 2R normal jackpot triggers a long-open round game in which the jackpot 54 opens for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It is a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers a short-open round game in which the jackpot 54 opens for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the long-opening round game is a round in which the opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a specified number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls can be entered in the large winning opening 54 or easily entered. It is a game. The short-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the large winning opening 54 is set so that a predetermined number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls cannot be entered or difficult to enter in the large winning opening 54.

Although not shown, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit, one small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of types of small hit symbols (symbol group), and the first 2 At the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the selected small hit symbol (symbol group) is to be stopped and displayed. The opening / closing pattern (opening time, number of times of opening) of the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game may be different depending on the type of the small hit symbol.

Subsequently, the gaming state of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, as a plurality of types of gaming states, a "normal gaming state", a "time saving gaming state", a "latent probability gaming state", and a "probability variation gaming state" are set. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function are activated is called a "probability change state" or a "probability change game state", and ( 2) The game state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "latent probability game state (latent probability change game state)" or "latent probability change state". Then, (3) the gaming state in which the special symbol's fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol's probability fluctuation function being activated is called the "time saving state" or the "time saving gaming state", and (4) ) A state in which all functions are not operating is referred to as a "normal state" or a "normal gaming state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state", the "latent probability game state", and the "time saving game state" are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". In addition, each game state is (1) depending on the combination of the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) Probability change game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent probability game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can also be expressed as a "low probability low base state". Here, as for the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, it suffices that the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the main player of the game in the game state, is shortened. In other words, it can be said that the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the game state (normal game state) in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main game. , In the game state (time saving game state, latent probability game state, probability variation game state) in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main game, the variation time of the second special symbol may be shortened.

FIG. 59 is a schematic view showing a game state setting table according to the second embodiment. In the game state setting table, for each big hit type (type of symbol group), a game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game is set. In the present embodiment, when the result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the game states after the end of the big hit game are (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) game at the time of big hit winning. It is set according to the state. The number of continuations of each game state (the number of times of variation display of the special symbol) is the number of probability fluctuations (the number of probability variation operations) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated and the fluctuation time in which the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated. It is set based on the number of shortening (the number of time reduction operations) and the number of times of electric support (the number of times of electric support operation) in which the electric chew support function is activated.

If "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" is won in the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed. The latent game state is set as the game state. When the game shifts to the latent game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "0 times" are set. This latent game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the latent game state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

When the "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" is won in the first special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the transition to the normal game state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the "4R normal jackpot (symbol group D)" is won in the first special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of probability fluctuations "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "70 times", and the number of electric support times "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number of times (70 times). When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

If "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" is won in the second special symbol, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot The game state set after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the game. Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state. In the case of a state or a latent game state, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set, and the latent probabilistic game after the jackpot game ends. When shifting to the state, the probability fluctuation number "100 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probabilistic game state continues until the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the transition to the normal game state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol. Similarly, the latent game state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the latent game state ends when the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbol.

When the "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, the probabilistic gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When the game shifts to the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the electric support number "100 times" are set. This probabilistic gaming state continues until the number of variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of STs (100 times). When the probability variation game state ends when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the transition to the normal game state is performed from the next variation display of the special symbol.

When the "2R normal jackpot (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. When the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed, the probability fluctuation number "0 times", the fluctuation time shortening number "70 times", and the electric support number "70 times" are set. In this time-saving game state, the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches a specific number of times (70 times), or this specific number of times (
Continue until the next big hit occurs within 70 times). When the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times (70 times), the game shifts to the normal game state from the next variation display of the special symbol.

As described above, the occurrence of a big hit can trigger a transition of the gaming state, but the occurrence of a small hit does not trigger a transition of the gaming state. That is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the final round, which is the end condition of the game state (for example, the variation display of the 100th rotation of the probability variation game state and the latent probability game state, the time saving game). Except for the change display of the 70th rotation of the state), the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the gaming state is not performed when the small hit is won. That is, if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the time-saving gaming state. The game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the time-saving game state, and if the game state before the small hit occurs is the probability change game state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the probability change game state. If the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is the latent game state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the latent game state.

Subsequently, the effect mode of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the second embodiment, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variation mode are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and a gaming state (or a variation pattern) is set. Depending on the selected state) and the like, any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed.

Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal mode" is set, and when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the "time-saving mode" is set, and the gaming state is the latent gaming state. When the game state is the probability change game state, the "probability change mode" is set. However, when shifting to the normal state based on the end of the non-normal gaming state (time saving game state, latent probability game state, probability variation game state), the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the game state shifts to the normal game state. In, a special effect mode is set, and a normal effect mode is set when the predetermined number of variable displays is completed. The predetermined number of times is "4 times" as the number of times of variation display of the special symbol. This means that the cumulative number of fluctuations displayed for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". That is, when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, it means that the total number of the variation display number of the first special symbol and the variation display number of the second special symbol has reached "4 times". As a modification of the modification, only the variation display number of the first special symbol reaches the predetermined number (4 times), or only the variation display number of the second special symbol reaches the predetermined number (4 times). As an opportunity, the special mode may be terminated (the mode may be shifted to the normal mode). Then, when any of the effect modes is set, a background image (decorative pattern back display) dedicated to the effect mode is displayed on the screen as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the user is staying in the effect mode. The background image) is displayed, and the BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

Subsequently, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a comparison table of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the second embodiment. Although the variation pattern table of the special symbol is omitted in the second embodiment, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is actually the same as that of the first embodiment. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

In (A) in the figure, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state is indicated. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is "3 seconds to 60" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect.
It is set to "seconds", and when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, it is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds". The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit or a miss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. That is, with respect to the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long fluctuation time (1000 seconds) is set as compared with other fluctuation times, except when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit.

In (B) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state, and the latent probabilistic gaming state is shown. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, and is set to "0.5 seconds" when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit. If the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, it is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds".

Subsequently, the ordinary symbol lottery in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol lottery in the second embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table, (B) in the figure shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) in the figure shows a normal electric accessory opening pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support When the function (probability fluctuation function of a normal symbol) is operating, it is set to "1 / 1.01". Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is not operating, and the electric chew support is set. When the function (normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is activated, it is set to "0.2 seconds". That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Regardless of which of the fluctuation patterns of the normal symbols is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbols is set to "0.1 seconds". The fixed stop time of the normal symbol (fixed display time) is the time during which the normal symbol is definitively stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 61 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "opening for 1 second → closing for 2 seconds → closing for 1 second" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is not operating. It is set to "open → close for 2 seconds → open for 1 second", and is set to "open for 5.9 seconds" when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is activated. That is, as an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, so the total opening time is "3 seconds", and in the high base state, it is 5.9 seconds. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

Subsequently, simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation processing (variation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol are executed separately and independently, so that the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71 is executed. The specification (the so-called parallel machine) is adopted, in which the variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel at the same time. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol and the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to the corresponding win / loss lottery and variable display. Etc. are performed in parallel. Therefore, even if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a long period of time, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variable display of the other special symbol. Is performed, so that the variable display of the other special symbol is not delayed during the execution of the variable display of the other special symbol. In the following, regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of the big hit is referred to as the "big hit fluctuation display", and the fluctuation display of the small hit is referred to as the "small hit fluctuation display". The fluctuation display of is called "off-the-fly fluctuation display".

(Fluctuation interruption processing)
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuation display of one special symbol is the jackpot fluctuation display, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display. In the situation where the variation display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the variation display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from the end of the small hit variation display of the other special symbol to the end of the small hit game ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). Note that the interruption of the variable display is used to mean that the variable display is paused (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol is completed, the measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the fluctuation time before the restart and the measurement time of the fluctuation time after the restart are displayed. When the total time of is reached the preset predetermined fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuating forced stop processing)
On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot fluctuation display and the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display, one of them. In a situation where the big hit fluctuation display of the special symbol of 1 and the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol ends. Previously, when the jackpot fluctuation display of one special symbol was completed, the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the missed fluctuation display of the other special symbol was set in advance, and the specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value). Even before reaching, when the jackpot variation display of one special symbol ends, the small hit variation display or the missed variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated in conjunction with or in synchronization with it. When the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the symbol (confirmed display symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit variation display shall be replaced with a symbol that is out of the small hit symbol. .. That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off variation display (as a result, the small hit game is canceled). As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big hit game) in one special symbol and the special game (small hit game) in the other special symbol compete with each other. When the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as the jackpot variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is other than the jackpot variation display. Change display (that is, loss change display or small hit variation display, and if the hit / fail random number corresponds to a big hit in the hit / fail judgment process, the hit / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with the missed number and the hit / miss variation display is used). Is desirable. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is out of order fluctuation display (whether or not it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit in the hit / fail judgment process) If it is a random number, the hit / fail judgment result may be forcibly replaced with a wrong number, and the wrong result may be displayed.

≪Playability of small hit RUSH≫
Next, the playability of the small hit RUSH (latent mode) will be described. In the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the small hit is frequently made in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball being inserted into the second starting port 52, and the small hit is made until the big hit is won. It is a game that aims to generate hit games continuously and intensively.

When the gaming state is the latent gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the operating gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.02) in the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol. In this latent game state (low base state), when the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. is there. Further, in this latent game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the first when the small hit is won. 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52.

At this time, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, the second special symbol The fluctuation display of is finished in an extremely short time, and the small hit game is started immediately. Here, the ordinary electric accessory 522 is configured to perform a closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after the opening operation for 1 second (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 has the normal electric accessory 522 (movable) during the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the big winning opening 54 through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hit game, the game ball flowing down the right side region PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is arranged diagonally below the large prize. By flowing down toward the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the large winning mouth 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the gaming ball is inserted into the second starting port 52 to frequently display the variation of the second special symbol, and until the next big hit occurs. It is a game that allows small hit games to be executed frequently. As a result, every time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the large prize opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the player It is possible to advance the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, the probability of winning a small hit is extremely high in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short. Small hit games are more likely to occur frequently. However, in order to limit the game playability of the small hit RUSH to only the latent game state and suppress the increase in the number of balls held by the small hit game for the game states other than the latent game state, the following measures are taken. Has been done.

Specifically, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probability variation game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.01) in the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol. To. In this gaming state (high base state), when the winning / failing determination of the normal symbol is won, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to let the game ball enter the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. .. Further, even in this time-saving game state or the probability variation game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that small hits will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. high.

Here, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display ends in an extremely short time, and the small hit game starts immediately. At this time, if the small hit game is executed while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right area PA2. The game ball to be played is extremely easy to enter the open ordinary electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the large winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, if the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed and operated (after the second starting port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operating gate 53. Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 is opened to the opening operation is set to an extremely short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), this immediately released ordinary electric accessory It is easy for a game ball to enter 522. That is, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric accessory 522 (second starting port 52) is almost left open, and the game ball flowing down the right region PA2 is in the open state. It is extremely easy to enter the ball into the object 522 (second starting port 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the ball into the large winning opening 54 arranged downstream thereof. Therefore, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a probabilistic game state (high base state), the game ball reaches the big winning opening 54 even if small hits frequently occur in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol. The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of balls to be played by small hit games.

Further, even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (excluding the limited period), the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1) in the winning / failing determination of the second special symbol. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), the player enters the game ball into the second starting port 52 and plays a game aiming at a small hit. Even so, the efficiency of digestion of the second special symbol is very low, and the small hit game cannot be frequently performed. In the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be relatively high (second special). The fluctuation time of the symbol is not extremely long). That is, in the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state (variation display within 4 rotations), the fluctuation display after the completion of the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of rotations (variation display after the fifth rotation) is more than. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol (average value of the fluctuation time) is shortened, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the second embodiment, during the execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 of the screen, and the player can be notified of the cumulative number of prize balls. It is configured in. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of this small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, but the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed (general winning opening count). Up production) is configured to be performed. In addition, when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 in the small hit game performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of this small hit RUSH (latent mode). It is preferable that the cumulative number of prize balls is additionally displayed (large winning opening count-up effect). As a modification, even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed (general winning opening). It may be configured so that the count-up effect) is not performed.

In addition, also in the second embodiment, by applying the characteristic configuration of the above-mentioned first embodiment, the same action and effect as the above-mentioned first embodiment can be obtained, and as a result, the interest of the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

As a modification of the second embodiment, the second starting port 52 may be configured as a winning opening that is always open. That is, in this modification, the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (normally open starting ports), and are not normally equipped with electric accessories. FIG. 63 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, the second starting opening 52 is arranged in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and the large winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally downward to the left. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting opening switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 52 is a constantly open type winning opening that is opened upward, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) that mainly flows down the right region PA2 can enter. That is, the second starting port 52 also serves as a general winning opening 64 in which the game ball flowing down the right region PA2 can always enter, regardless of whether it is in the special gaming state or the non-special gaming state. It is configured so that you can always enter the ball. In this modified example, when a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the special game, the bonus winning effect and the cumulative number of winning balls are added and displayed (general winning opening count). Up production) is performed. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the special game, only the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed (general winning opening count-up effect), which is a bonus. The winning effect may be configured so as not to be performed. In addition, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning opening 64) during the execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed and the cumulative number of winning balls is additionally displayed. (General prize opening count-up production) may be configured so as not to be performed.

[Common transformation example]
Next, a modified example of the above embodiment will be described. The game machine according to this modified example basically has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same parts have the same configuration. The explanation is omitted by adding a reference, and mainly different parts will be described.

<Common modification 1>
In the above embodiment, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, a normal probabilistic gaming machine that determines the presence / absence of the probabilistic transition based on the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special symbol is adopted. It is not limited, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, it is judged whether or not there is a probability change transition depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the big hit game. A probabilistic gaming machine may be adopted. Further, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, a probabilistic gaming state given when a big hit is obtained with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, up to a preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times). Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive latent gaming states may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a normal probability change machine that continues from the end of the jackpot game to the occurrence of the next jackpot, but the probability variation function of the special symbol has a specified number of STs. It may be configured as a number-cutting probability changer that operates continuously only (for example, 100 times).

<Common modification 2>
In the above embodiment, a model having only one large winning opening in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model having a plurality of large winning openings in the game area is applied. You may. In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of large winning openings, the above-mentioned V probability variation game machine is provided with a specific area (probability variation function operation area, V area) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of a special symbol. It may be equipped with two or more large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening that does not have this specific area (probability fluctuation function operating area, V area). As an example of the board surface arrangement, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or substantially horizontally in the right side area of the game area, or the first large winning opening may be arranged. The board surface area to be created and the board surface area in which the second large winning opening is arranged may be different areas. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out when the game ball enters the first large winning opening and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second large winning opening. The number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) may be the same or different. Of the two major winning openings, the first major winning opening (or the second major winning opening) is for small hit games, and the second major winning opening (or first major winning opening) is for big hit games. It may be configured as a big winning opening. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize opening for small hit games may be 10, and the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big prize openings for big hit games may be 15. Good.

<Common modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among a plurality of types of gaming states, the latent probability changing gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, and the latent probability change game state is defined as a game state in which only the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric chew support function are not activated. You may. In addition, the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is divided into the fluctuation time shortening function of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol, and the latent probability variation game state is divided into the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the first. 2 It may be defined as a gaming state in which the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, even if the electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time shortening function), the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol fluctuation time) It may operate independently of the shortening function).

Next, in order to make it easier to clearly understand the technical significance of the above-described embodiment and the modified example, the problems corresponding to the above-described embodiment and the modified example will be outlined.

It is known that conventional pachinko game machines perform a large prize opening prize production (for example, prize ball number display and sound effect output) when a game ball enters the large winning opening during a special game. (For example, see "Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-123602").

Further, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, it is known that game information related to the operating status of the gaming machine is output as an external information signal to an external device arranged outside the gaming machine (for example, "" Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325923 ”).

However, since many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is required to further improve the interest of the game in order to differentiate from the conventional models. .. In addition, since many pachinko gaming machines that adopt such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is necessary to manage the operating status of the gaming machines more appropriately in order to differentiate them from the conventional models. It has been demanded.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above embodiment and the modified example, the above-mentioned configuration is adopted for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, and the above-mentioned action and effect are achieved.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be appropriately improved as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. In addition, each component described in the above-described embodiment and modified example is appropriately combined, or a part of each component described in the above-described embodiment and modified example is deleted or converted by a well-known / conventional technique or the like. It is also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area PA1 Left area PA2 Right area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 15 Direction button 20 Game board 51 1st start port 52 2nd start port 53 Operating gate 54 Large winning port 64 General winning opening 70 Production display device 71 1st special symbol display device 72 2nd special symbol display device 100 Main control board 200 Production control board 220 Production control means 300 Image control board 400 Payout control board 500 Power supply board 600 External information terminal board 541 Grand prize opening switch 641 Left general winning opening switch

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A starting port provided in the game area where a game ball can enter,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the starting port,
A large winning opening provided in the game area and opened according to the result of the hit / fail judgment by the hit / miss judgment means to allow the game ball to enter.
A unit for opening the large winning opening until the number of game balls entered into the large winning opening reaches a specified number or the specified time elapses when the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means is a big hit. A special game execution means that can shift to a special game in which the game is repeated multiple times,
An effect display device that displays the effect display and
Equipped with an audio output device that outputs directing audio
The execution period of the special game is the start demo period, which is the period set between the start of execution of the special game and the start of execution of the first unit game, and the execution of the last unit game from the start of execution of the first unit game. Including the unit game execution period, which is the period until the end, and the end demo period, which is the period set between the end of the execution of the last unit game and the end of the execution of the special game.
If the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening in one unit game exceeds the specified number as the specified number exceeding condition, and the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, 1 It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests or notifies that the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening in a unit game exceeds the specified number.
It is configured to be able to determine multiple types of errors, including at least the first error and the second error.
The second error is an error related to the payout of the prize ball, while the first error is an error different from the error related to the payout of the prize ball.
In the situation where the first error occurs during the execution of the special game, if the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied, at least a part or all of the specific effect is not executed, while
If the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied in the situation where the first error occurs during the execution of the special game, the game ball enters the large winning opening that triggers the satisfaction of the specified number exceeding condition. It is possible to pay out prize balls based on
In the situation where the second error occurs during the execution of the special game, if the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied, the specific effect can be executed, while the specific effect can be executed.
If the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied in the situation where the second error occurs during the execution of the special game, the game ball enters the large winning opening that triggers the satisfaction of the specified number exceeding condition. It is configured so that the payout of prize balls based on is not executed.
During the execution of the special game, the cumulative prize ball number display, which is a display showing the cumulative value of the prize ball number given to the player, can be updated and displayed when the game ball enters the large prize opening. ,
When the cumulative prize ball number display is updated and displayed, it is an effect that is executed for a predetermined time in response to the entry of one game ball into the large winning opening, and the number of prize balls given based on the entry. It is possible to execute a count-up effect, which is an effect that indicates that the cumulative prize ball number display is counting up by the amount.
During the execution of a special game, even though a certain count-up effect corresponding to the entry of a certain game ball into the large winning opening is being executed, the large winning opening is Even if there is a new ball entering a game ball different from the one game ball, the execution of the certain count-up effect is not interrupted in the middle, and the certain count-up effect is executed. After the end, it is configured to start executing a new count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one new game ball.
During the execution of one unit game, the total execution time of the count-up effect when the count-up effect for a predetermined time is executed the same number of times as twice the specified number is longer than the end demo period. It is set short and
It is provided in the game area and has a predetermined winning opening where a game ball can enter.
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening during the execution of the special game.
During the execution of the special game, when the cumulative value of the number of prize balls reaches a specific value, the display corresponding to the specific value indicating that the cumulative value of the number of prize balls has reached the specific value is displayed. Can be displayed separately from
If the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening in one unit game exceeds the specified number as the specified number exceeding condition, and the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied during the execution of the special game, 1 It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests or notifies that the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening in a unit game exceeds the specified number.
Even if a game ball enters the large winning opening while a certain specific value correspondence display is displayed, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls shown in the certain specific value correspondence display is updated and displayed. Instead, the display corresponding to a specific value is continuously displayed for a specific time, while
If a game ball enters the large winning opening while a certain specific value correspondence display is displayed, a count-up effect triggered by the entry is displayed while displaying the specific value correspondence display. Can be executed at the same time,
When a game ball enters the predetermined winning opening while the specific value correspondence display is displayed, the predetermined effect can be executed at the same time while displaying the specific value correspondence display. ,
If the specified number exceeding condition is satisfied while the specific value correspondence display is displayed, the specific effect can be executed at the same time while the specific value correspondence display is displayed. , Pachinko game machine.